0% found this document useful (0 votes)
3 views239 pages

el252xen_annoté

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 239

Documentation | EN

EL252x
Pulse Train Output Terminal, Incremental Encoder Simulation Terminal
(Pulse Train)

2023-02-17 | Version: 4.3


Table of contents

Table of contents
1 Foreword .................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Product overview Pulse Train Output Terminals ............................................................................... 7
1.2 Notes on the documentation ............................................................................................................. 8
1.3 Safety instructions ............................................................................................................................. 9
1.4 Documentation Issue Status ........................................................................................................... 10
1.5 Version identification of EtherCAT devices ..................................................................................... 11
1.5.1 General notes on marking................................................................................................ 11
1.5.2 Version identification of EL terminals ............................................................................... 11
1.5.3 Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC) ................................................................................... 12
1.5.4 Electronic access to the BIC (eBIC)................................................................................. 14

2 EL2521-xxxx - Product description ....................................................................................................... 16


2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Technical data ................................................................................................................................. 17
2.3 Start Up ........................................................................................................................................... 17

3 EL2522 - Product description ................................................................................................................ 18


3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 18
3.2 Technical data ................................................................................................................................. 19
3.3 Start Up ........................................................................................................................................... 19

4 Basics communication ........................................................................................................................... 20


4.1 EtherCAT basics ............................................................................................................................. 20
4.2 EtherCAT cabling – wire-bound ...................................................................................................... 20
4.3 General notes for setting the watchdog .......................................................................................... 21
4.4 EtherCAT State Machine ................................................................................................................ 23
4.5 CoE Interface .................................................................................................................................. 25
4.6 Distributed Clock ............................................................................................................................. 30

5 Mounting and Wiring............................................................................................................................... 31


5.1 Instructions for ESD protection ....................................................................................................... 31
5.2 Explosion protection ........................................................................................................................ 32
5.2.1 ATEX - Special conditions (standard temperature range)................................................ 32
5.2.2 ATEX - Special conditions (extended temperature range)............................................... 33
5.2.3 Continuative documentation for ATEX and IECEx........................................................... 34
5.3 UL notice ......................................................................................................................................... 35
5.4 Installation on mounting rails........................................................................................................... 36
5.5 Installation instructions for enhanced mechanical load capacity..................................................... 39
5.6 Connection ...................................................................................................................................... 40
5.6.1 Connection system........................................................................................................... 40
5.6.2 Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 42
5.6.3 Shielding .......................................................................................................................... 43
5.7 Note - Power supply ........................................................................................................................ 43
5.8 EL2521-xxxx - LEDs and connection .............................................................................................. 44
5.8.1 EL2521............................................................................................................................. 44
5.8.2 EL2521-0024.................................................................................................................... 45
5.8.3 EL2521-0124.................................................................................................................... 46

EL252x Version: 4.3 3


Table of contents

5.8.4 EL2521-0025.................................................................................................................... 47
5.8.5 Connecting the inputs ...................................................................................................... 48
5.8.6 Connection of the outputs ................................................................................................ 48
5.9 EL2522 - LEDs and connection ...................................................................................................... 50
5.10 Installation positions ........................................................................................................................ 52
5.11 Positioning of passive Terminals..................................................................................................... 54
5.12 Disposal .......................................................................................................................................... 55

6 Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................... 56
6.1 TwinCAT Quick Start....................................................................................................................... 56
6.1.1 TwinCAT 2 ....................................................................................................................... 59
6.1.2 TwinCAT 3 ....................................................................................................................... 69
6.2 TwinCAT Development Environment .............................................................................................. 82
6.2.1 Installation of the TwinCAT real-time driver ..................................................................... 83
6.2.2 Notes regarding ESI device description ........................................................................... 89
6.2.3 TwinCAT ESI Updater...................................................................................................... 93
6.2.4 Distinction between Online and Offline ............................................................................ 93
6.2.5 OFFLINE configuration creation....................................................................................... 94
6.2.6 ONLINE configuration creation ........................................................................................ 99
6.2.7 EtherCAT subscriber configuration ................................................................................ 107
6.2.8 Import/Export of EtherCAT devices with SCI and XTI.................................................... 116
6.3 General Notes - EtherCAT Slave Application ............................................................................... 122
6.4 Integration into the NC configuration............................................................................................. 130
6.4.1 EL252x - when using the predefined PDO Assignments "n Ch Standard 16 Bit (MDP
253/511)"........................................................................................................................ 134
6.4.2 EL2522 - when using the predefined PDO Assignments "n Ch Standard 32 Bit (MDP
253/511) continuous position w. arrival time"................................................................. 135
6.4.3 EL2522 - when using older FW or older TwinCAT versions with "Continuous Position"
mode .............................................................................................................................. 135
6.5 EL2521-xxxx ................................................................................................................................. 137
6.5.1 Basic function principles................................................................................................. 137
6.5.2 Process data .................................................................................................................. 149
6.5.3 Normal operation mode.................................................................................................. 153
6.5.4 Enhanced operation mode ............................................................................................. 160
6.6 EL2522 .......................................................................................................................................... 186
6.6.1 Basic function principles................................................................................................. 186
6.6.2 Process Data.................................................................................................................. 191
6.6.3 Object description and parameterization........................................................................ 200
6.6.4 Connection of the EL2522 in the NC.............................................................................. 220

7 Appendix ................................................................................................................................................ 223


7.1 Firmware compatibility .................................................................................................................. 223
7.2 Firmware Update EL/ES/EM/ELM/EPxxxx.................................................................................... 225
7.2.1 Device description ESI file/XML ..................................................................................... 226
7.2.2 Firmware explanation..................................................................................................... 229
7.2.3 Updating controller firmware *.efw ................................................................................. 229
7.2.4 FPGA firmware *.rbf ....................................................................................................... 231
7.2.5 Simultaneous updating of several EtherCAT devices .................................................... 235

4 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Table of contents

7.3 Restoring the delivery state........................................................................................................... 236


7.4 Support and Service...................................................................................................................... 237

EL252x Version: 4.3 5


Table of contents

6 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Foreword

1 Foreword

1.1 Product overview Pulse Train Output Terminals


EL2521 [} 16] 1-channel pulse train output terminal (RS422)
EL2521-0024 [} 16] 1-channel pulse train output terminal (24 VDC)
EL2521-0025 [} 16] 1-channel pulse train output terminal (24 VDC, negative switching)
EL2521-0124 [} 16] 1-channel pulse train output terminal (latch input, 24 VDC output)
EL2522 [} 18] 2-channel incremental encoder simulation terminal (pulse train)

EL252x Version: 4.3 7


Foreword

1.2 Notes on the documentation


Intended audience

This description is only intended for the use of trained specialists in control and automation engineering who
are familiar with the applicable national standards.
It is essential that the documentation and the following notes and explanations are followed when installing
and commissioning these components.
It is the duty of the technical personnel to use the documentation published at the respective time of each
installation and commissioning.

The responsible staff must ensure that the application or use of the products described satisfy all the
requirements for safety, including all the relevant laws, regulations, guidelines and standards.

Disclaimer

The documentation has been prepared with care. The products described are, however, constantly under
development.

We reserve the right to revise and change the documentation at any time and without prior announcement.

No claims for the modification of products that have already been supplied may be made on the basis of the
data, diagrams and descriptions in this documentation.

Trademarks

Beckhoff®, TwinCAT®, TwinCAT/BSD®, TC/BSD®, EtherCAT®, EtherCAT G®, EtherCAT G10®, EtherCAT P®,
Safety over EtherCAT®, TwinSAFE®, XFC®, XTS® and XPlanar® are registered trademarks of and licensed by
Beckhoff Automation GmbH. Other designations used in this publication may be trademarks whose use by
third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

Patent Pending

The EtherCAT Technology is covered, including but not limited to the following patent applications and
patents: EP1590927, EP1789857, EP1456722, EP2137893, DE102015105702 with corresponding
applications or registrations in various other countries.

EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH,
Germany.

Copyright

© Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG, Germany.


The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its contents to
others without express authorization are prohibited.
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a
patent, utility model or design.

8 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Foreword

1.3 Safety instructions


Safety regulations

Please note the following safety instructions and explanations!


Product-specific safety instructions can be found on following pages or in the areas mounting, wiring,
commissioning etc.

Exclusion of liability

All the components are supplied in particular hardware and software configurations appropriate for the
application. Modifications to hardware or software configurations other than those described in the
documentation are not permitted, and nullify the liability of Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG.

Personnel qualification

This description is only intended for trained specialists in control, automation and drive engineering who are
familiar with the applicable national standards.

Description of instructions

In this documentation the following instructions are used.


These instructions must be read carefully and followed without fail!

DANGER
Serious risk of injury!
Failure to follow this safety instruction directly endangers the life and health of persons.

WARNING
Risk of injury!
Failure to follow this safety instruction endangers the life and health of persons.

CAUTION
Personal injuries!
Failure to follow this safety instruction can lead to injuries to persons.

NOTE
Damage to environment/equipment or data loss
Failure to follow this instruction can lead to environmental damage, equipment damage or data loss.

Tip or pointer
This symbol indicates information that contributes to better understanding.

EL252x Version: 4.3 9


Foreword

1.4 Documentation Issue Status


Version Comment
4.3 - Update chapter "Technical data"
- Update chapter "Mounting and wiring"
- Update chapter "EL2522 - LEDs and connection"
- Update structure
4.2 - Update chapter "Basic function principles"
- Update structure
- Update revision status
4.1 - New title page
- Update chapter "Technical data"
- Update structure
- Update revision status
4.0 - Update chapter "Technical data"
- Update structure
3.9 - Update chapter "Basic function principles"
- Update revision status
- Update structure
3.8 - Update chapter "Mounting and wiring"
- Update revision status
- Update structure
3.7 - New layout safety instructions
- Update chapter "Technical data"
- Update chapter "LEDs and connection"
- Chapter " ATEX - Special conditions (extended temperature range)" added
- Chapter "Integration into the NC" added
- Update revision status
- Update structure
3.6 - Update chapter "Commissioning"
3.5 - Update chapter "Technical data"
- Structure update
- Update chapter "Connection technology" -> "Connection"
- Update chapter "Firmware update EL/ES/EM/EPxxxx"
3.4 - Update chapter "Technical data"
- Note on ESD protection added
3.3 - Update chapter "Commissioning"
3.2 - Update chapter "Notes on documentation"
- Correction of technical data
- Update chapter "TwinCAT 2.1x" -> chapter "TwinCAT Development Environment" and chapter "TwinCAT Quick Start"
- Update revision status
3.1 - Renaming and restructuring of the chapter "Connection of the EL2522 in the NC"
3.0 - Revision/migration
- EL2522 amended
2.8 - Update chapter "Technical data"
- Chapter "Installation instructions for enhanced mechanical load capacity" amended
- Structure update
2.7 - Update chapter "Basic function principles"
2.6 - Update travel distance control
2.5 - Update Technical data
2.4 - Firmware compatibility list and technical notes amended
2.3 - Correction of LED description
2.2 - Addendum EL2521-0124
2.1 - Addendum EL2521-0024, EL2521-0025
2.0 - Addendum Technical data, CoE, PDO
1.0 - Correction in technical data
0.1 - Provisional documentation for EL2521

10 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Foreword

1.5 Version identification of EtherCAT devices

1.5.1 General notes on marking

Designation

A Beckhoff EtherCAT device has a 14-digit designation, made up of


• family key
• type
• version
• revision
Example Family Type Version Revision
EL3314-0000-0016 EL terminal 3314 (4-channel thermocouple 0000 (basic type) 0016
(12 mm, non- terminal)
pluggable connection
level)
ES3602-0010-0017 ES terminal 3602 (2-channel voltage 0010 (high- 0017
(12 mm, pluggable measurement) precision version)
connection level)
CU2008-0000-0000 CU device 2008 (8-port fast ethernet switch) 0000 (basic type) 0000

Notes
• The elements mentioned above result in the technical designation. EL3314-0000-0016 is used in the
example below.
• EL3314-0000 is the order identifier, in the case of “-0000” usually abbreviated to EL3314. “-0016” is the
EtherCAT revision.
• The order identifier is made up of
- family key (EL, EP, CU, ES, KL, CX, etc.)
- type (3314)
- version (-0000)
• The revision -0016 shows the technical progress, such as the extension of features with regard to the
EtherCAT communication, and is managed by Beckhoff.
In principle, a device with a higher revision can replace a device with a lower revision, unless specified
otherwise, e.g. in the documentation.
Associated and synonymous with each revision there is usually a description (ESI, EtherCAT Slave
Information) in the form of an XML file, which is available for download from the Beckhoff web site.
From 2014/01 the revision is shown on the outside of the IP20 terminals, see Fig. “EL5021 EL terminal,
standard IP20 IO device with batch number and revision ID (since 2014/01)”.
• The type, version and revision are read as decimal numbers, even if they are technically saved in
hexadecimal.

1.5.2 Version identification of EL terminals


The serial number/ data code for Beckhoff IO devices is usually the 8-digit number printed on the device or
on a sticker. The serial number indicates the configuration in delivery state and therefore refers to a whole
production batch, without distinguishing the individual modules of a batch.
Structure of the serial number: KK YY FF HH Example with serial number 12 06 3A 02:
KK - week of production (CW, calendar week) 12 - production week 12
YY - year of production 06 - production year 2006
FF - firmware version 3A - firmware version 3A
HH - hardware version 02 - hardware version 02

EL252x Version: 4.3 11


Foreword

Fig. 1: EL2872 with revision 0022 and serial number 01200815

1.5.3 Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC)


The Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC) is increasingly being applied to Beckhoff products to uniquely identify
the product. The BIC is represented as a Data Matrix Code (DMC, code scheme ECC200), the content is
based on the ANSI standard MH10.8.2-2016.

Fig. 2: BIC as data matrix code (DMC, code scheme ECC200)

The BIC will be introduced step by step across all product groups.

Depending on the product, it can be found in the following places:


• on the packaging unit
• directly on the product (if space suffices)
• on the packaging unit and the product

The BIC is machine-readable and contains information that can also be used by the customer for handling
and product management.

Each piece of information can be uniquely identified using the so-called data identifier
(ANSI MH10.8.2-2016). The data identifier is followed by a character string. Both together have a maximum
length according to the table below. If the information is shorter, spaces are added to it.

Following information is possible, positions 1 to 4 are always present, the other according to need of
production:

12 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Foreword

Posi- Type of Explanation Data Number of digits Example


tion information identifier incl. data identifier
1 Beckhoff order Beckhoff order number 1P 8 1P072222
number
2 Beckhoff Traceability Unique serial number, SBTN 12 SBTNk4p562d7
Number (BTN) see note below
3 Article description Beckhoff article 1K 32 1KEL1809
description, e.g.
EL1008
4 Quantity Quantity in packaging Q 6 Q1
unit, e.g. 1, 10, etc.
5 Batch number Optional: Year and week 2P 14 2P401503180016
of production
6 ID/serial number Optional: Present-day 51S 12 51S678294
serial number system,
e.g. with safety products
7 Variant number Optional: Product variant 30P 32 30PF971, 2*K183
number on the basis of
standard products
...

Further types of information and data identifiers are used by Beckhoff and serve internal processes.

Structure of the BIC

Example of composite information from positions 1 to 4 and with the above given example value on position
6. The data identifiers are highlighted in bold font:

1P072222SBTNk4p562d71KEL1809 Q1 51S678294

Accordingly as DMC:

Fig. 3: Example DMC 1P072222SBTNk4p562d71KEL1809 Q1 51S678294

BTN

An important component of the BIC is the Beckhoff Traceability Number (BTN, position 2). The BTN is a
unique serial number consisting of eight characters that will replace all other serial number systems at
Beckhoff in the long term (e.g. batch designations on IO components, previous serial number range for
safety products, etc.). The BTN will also be introduced step by step, so it may happen that the BTN is not yet
coded in the BIC.

NOTE
This information has been carefully prepared. However, the procedure described is constantly being further
developed. We reserve the right to revise and change procedures and documentation at any time and
without prior notice. No claims for changes can be made from the information, illustrations and descriptions
in this information.

EL252x Version: 4.3 13


Foreword

1.5.4 Electronic access to the BIC (eBIC)

Electronic BIC (eBIC)

The Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC) is applied to the outside of Beckhoff products in a visible place. If
possible, it should also be electronically readable.

Decisive for the electronic readout is the interface via which the product can be electronically addressed.

K-bus devices (IP20, IP67)

Currently, no electronic storage and readout is planned for these devices.

EtherCAT devices (IP20, IP67)

All Beckhoff EtherCAT devices have a so-called ESI-EEPROM, which contains the EtherCAT identity with
the revision number. Stored in it is the EtherCAT slave information, also colloquially known as ESI/XML
configuration file for the EtherCAT master. See the corresponding chapter in the EtherCAT system manual
(Link) for the relationships.

The eBIC is also stored in the ESI‑EEPROM. The eBIC was introduced into the Beckhoff I/O production
(terminals, box modules) from 2020; widespread implementation is expected in 2021.

The user can electronically access the eBIC (if existent) as follows:
• With all EtherCAT devices, the EtherCAT master (TwinCAT) can read the eBIC from the ESI‑EEPROM
◦ From TwinCAT 3.1 build 4024.11, the eBIC can be displayed in the online view.
◦ To do this,
check the checkbox "Show Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC)" under
EtherCAT → Advanced Settings → Diagnostics:

◦ The BTN and its contents are then displayed:

◦ Note: as can be seen in the illustration, the production data HW version, FW version and
production date, which have been programmed since 2012, can also be displayed with "Show
Production Info".
◦ From TwinCAT 3.1. build 4024.24 the functions FB_EcReadBIC and FB_EcReadBTN for reading
into the PLC and further eBIC auxiliary functions are available in the Tc2_EtherCAT Library from
v3.3.19.0.
• In the case of EtherCAT devices with CoE directory, the object 0x10E2:01 can additionally by used to
display the device's own eBIC; the PLC can also simply access the information here:

14 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Foreword

◦ The device must be in PREOP/SAFEOP/OP for access:

◦ the object 0x10E2 will be introduced into stock products in the course of a necessary firmware
revision.
◦ From TwinCAT 3.1. build 4024.24 the functions FB_EcCoEReadBIC and FB_EcCoEReadBTN for
reading into the PLC and further eBIC auxiliary functions are available in the Tc2_EtherCAT
Library from v3.3.19.0.
• Note: in the case of electronic further processing, the BTN is to be handled as a string(8); the identifier
"SBTN" is not part of the BTN.
• Technical background
The new BIC information is additionally written as a category in the ESI‑EEPROM during the device
production. The structure of the ESI content is largely dictated by the ETG specifications, therefore the
additional vendor-specific content is stored with the help of a category according to ETG.2010. ID 03
indicates to all EtherCAT masters that they must not overwrite these data in case of an update or
restore the data after an ESI update.
The structure follows the content of the BIC, see there. This results in a memory requirement of
approx. 50..200 bytes in the EEPROM.
• Special cases
◦ If multiple, hierarchically arranged ESCs are installed in a device, only the top-level ESC carries
the eBIC Information.
◦ If multiple, non-hierarchically arranged ESCs are installed in a device, all ESCs carry the eBIC
Information.
◦ If the device consists of several sub-devices with their own identity, but only the top-level device is
accessible via EtherCAT, the eBIC of the top-level device is located in the CoE object directory
0x10E2:01 and the eBICs of the sub-devices follow in 0x10E2:nn.

Profibus/Profinet/DeviceNet… Devices

Currently, no electronic storage and readout is planned for these devices.

EL252x Version: 4.3 15


EL2521-xxxx - Product description

2 EL2521-xxxx - Product description

2.1 Introduction

Fig. 4: EL2521 variants

1 channel pulse train output terminal

The EL2521-xxxx output terminals output a pulse sequence to downstream receiving devices such as motor
output stages. For this purpose, it has two output channels A and B on the hardware side, the relationship
between which can be set, e.g. as a direction-dependent encoder characteristic. The EL2521-xxxx supports
two functions
• Pulse output with variable frequency
• Travel mode: pulse output with variable frequency and number of pulses

The EtherCAT Terminals indicate their signal state by means of light emitting diodes. The LEDs are clocked
with the outputs and each displays an active output.

The EL2521-xxxx is available in the following variants


• The EL2521 has two RS422 outputs and two digital inputs.
• In the EL2521-0024 the two output channels are designed as potential-free FET switches and can be
supplied externally.
• The EL2521-0124 also has potential-free FET switches like the -0024, but is also equipped with a latch
input and a 24 V output.
• In the EL2521-0025 the two output channels are negative-switching, potential-free FET switches and
can also be supplied externally. Note the logic reversal in the control.

Note: pulse width modulation is not possible with the EL2521-xxxx.

Quick links
• EtherCAT basics
• Commissioning [} 82]
• CoE description EL2521-00xx - normal operation mode [} 153]
• CoE description EL2521-00xx - enhanced operation mode [} 160]
• CoE description EL2521-0124 - enhanced operation mode [} 172]
• Process data and operation modes [} 149]

16 Version: 4.3 EL252x


EL2521-xxxx - Product description

2.2 Technical data


Technical data EL2521 EL2521-0024 EL2521-0124 EL2521-0025
Digital outputs 1 channel (2 differential 1 channel (2 potential- 1 channel (2 FET outputs) 1 channel (2 potential-free
outputs A, B) free FET outputs) 1 x 24 V output FET outputs),
negative switching
Digital inputs 2 (+T, +Z) 1 x latch input (5..24 VDC) 2 (+T, +Z)
Signal voltage RS422 level 5..24 VDC, external 24 VDC, external supply 5..24 VDC, external supply
supply
Load type RS422 and optocoupler, variable
min. 120 Ω
Output current max. (per 50 mA, RS485 max. 1 A
channel) specification
Switching threshold, "T" High: >5 V (max. 24 VDC), Low: <1 V
and "Z" inputs
Base frequency 0 ... 500 kHz, Default: 50 kHz
Resolution max. 15 bit
Step size 10 mHz
Voltage supply for via the E-bus
electronic
Current consumption via E- typ. 280 mA (load-dependent)
bus
Electrical isolation 500 V (E-bus/field voltage)
Bit width in process image def. 16 bit Data in, 16 bit Data out, 16 bit Control, 16 bit Status
Configuration via TwinCAT System Manager
Weight approx. 55 g
Permissible ambient 0°C ... + 55°C
temperature range during
operation
Permissible ambient -25°C ... + 85°C
temperature range during
storage
Permissible relative 95 %, no condensation
humidity
Dimensions (W x H x D) approx. 15 mm x 100 mm x 70 mm
Mounting [} 31] on 35 mm mounting rail conforms to EN 60715
Enhanced mechanical load Yes, see also installation instructions [} 39] for enhanced mechanical load capacity
capacity
Vibration/shock resistance conforms to EN 60068-2-6 / EN 60068-2-27
EMC immunity/emission conforms to EN 61000-6-2 / EN 61000-6-4
Protection class IP20
Installation position variable
Approvals/markings*) CE, EAC, UKCA
ATEX [} 32]
cULus [} 35]

*) Real applicable approvals/markings see type plate on the side (product marking).

Ex marking
Standard Marking
ATEX II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc

2.3 Start Up
For commissioning:
• mount the EL252x as described in the chapter Mounting and wiring [} 31]
• Configure the EL252x in TwinCAT as described in chapter Commissioning [} 56].

EL252x Version: 4.3 17


EL2522 - Product description

3 EL2522 - Product description

3.1 Introduction

2 channel incremental encoder simulation terminal (pulse train)

The EL2522 incremental encoder simulation terminal (pulse train) outputs a frequency-modulable signal on
two channels with four outputs.

The signal can be used to control motor drivers or other signal receivers, which are controlled by single
cycles. As with the EL2521 the pulse sequence and pulse number can be specified directly via the process
data in the frequency. Alternatively, the integrated travel distance control can be used. For each channel the
operating mode (frequency modulation, pulse/direction specification and incremental encoder simulation)
can be selected. In the ABC encoder simulation the EL2522 can control three output channels.

The EL2522 supports the basic operating modes of the EL2521 and has additional operating modes.

Quick links
• EtherCAT basics
• Commissioning [} 82]
• CoE description EL2522 [} 200]
• Process data and operation modes [} 191]

18 Version: 4.3 EL252x


EL2522 - Product description

3.2 Technical data


Technical data EL2522
Digital outputs RS422 differential outputs
alternatively:
2 channel (A, B)
or:
1 channel (A, B, C)
Signal voltage RS422 level (differential min. 1 V, max. 3 V)
Load type RS422 and optocoupler, min. 120 Ω
Max. output current (per channel) 50 mA, RS422 specification
Output frequency 0 ... 4 million increments/s (corresponding to 1 MHz
with 4-fold evaluation)
Duty factor 50 % (± 10 %)
Resolution max. 15 bit
Step size min. 10 ns (internal)
Power supply for the electronics via the E-bus
Current consumption via E-bus typ. 120 mA
Electrical isolation 500 V (E-bus/field voltage)
Bit width in process image default 14 bytes Data in, 28 bytes Data out
Configuration via TwinCAT System Manager
Weight approx. 50 g
Permissible ambient temperature range during -25 °C ... + 60 °C
operation
Permissible ambient temperature range during -40 °C ... + 85 °C
storage
Permissible relative air humidity 95 %, no condensation
Dimensions (W x H x D) approx. 15 mm x 100 mm x 70 mm
Mounting [} 31] on 35 mm mounting rail according to EN 60715
Enhanced mechanical load capacity yes, see also Installation instructions for enhanced
mechanical load capacity [} 39]
Vibration / shock resistance conforms to EN 60068-2-6 / EN 60068-2-27,
EMC immunity / emission conforms to EN 61000-6-2 / EN 61000-6-4
Protection class IP20
Installation position variable
Approvals/markings*) CE, EAC, UKCA
cULus [} 35]

*) Real applicable approvals/markings see type plate on the side (product marking).

3.3 Start Up
For commissioning:
• mount the EL252x as described in the chapter Mounting and wiring [} 31]
• Configure the EL252x in TwinCAT as described in chapter Commissioning [} 56].

EL252x Version: 4.3 19


Basics communication

4 Basics communication

4.1 EtherCAT basics


Please refer to the EtherCAT System Documentation for the EtherCAT fieldbus basics.

4.2 EtherCAT cabling – wire-bound


The cable length between two EtherCAT devices must not exceed 100 m. This results from the FastEthernet
technology, which, above all for reasons of signal attenuation over the length of the cable, allows a maximum
link length of 5 + 90 + 5 m if cables with appropriate properties are used. See also the Design
recommendations for the infrastructure for EtherCAT/Ethernet.

Cables and connectors

For connecting EtherCAT devices only Ethernet connections (cables + plugs) that meet the requirements of
at least category 5 (CAt5) according to EN 50173 or ISO/IEC 11801 should be used. EtherCAT uses 4 wires
for signal transfer.

EtherCAT uses RJ45 plug connectors, for example. The pin assignment is compatible with the Ethernet
standard (ISO/IEC 8802-3).
Pin Color of conductor Signal Description
1 yellow TD + Transmission Data +
2 orange TD - Transmission Data -
3 white RD + Receiver Data +
6 blue RD - Receiver Data -

Due to automatic cable detection (auto-crossing) symmetric (1:1) or cross-over cables can be used between
EtherCAT devices from Beckhoff.

Recommended cables
It is recommended to use the appropriate Beckhoff components e.g.
- cable sets ZK1090-9191-xxxx respectively
- RJ45 connector, field assembly ZS1090-0005
- EtherCAT cable, field assembly ZB9010, ZB9020
Suitable cables for the connection of EtherCAT devices can be found on the Beckhoff website!

E-Bus supply

A bus coupler can supply the EL terminals added to it with the E-bus system voltage of 5 V; a coupler is
thereby loadable up to 2 A as a rule (see details in respective device documentation).
Information on how much current each EL terminal requires from the E-bus supply is available online and in
the catalogue. If the added terminals require more current than the coupler can supply, then power feed
terminals (e.g. EL9410) must be inserted at appropriate places in the terminal strand.

The pre-calculated theoretical maximum E-Bus current is displayed in the TwinCAT System Manager. A
shortfall is marked by a negative total amount and an exclamation mark; a power feed terminal is to be
placed before such a position.

20 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Basics communication

Fig. 5: System manager current calculation

NOTE
Malfunction possible!
The same ground potential must be used for the E-Bus supply of all EtherCAT terminals in a terminal block!

4.3 General notes for setting the watchdog


The ELxxxx terminals are equipped with a safety device (watchdog) which, e.g. in the event of interrupted
process data traffic, switches the outputs (if present) to a presettable state after a presettable time,
depending on the device and setting, e.g. to FALSE (off) or an output value.

The EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) features two watchdogs:


• SM watchdog (default: 100 ms)
• PDI watchdog (default: 100 ms)

Their times are individually parameterized in TwinCAT as follows:

EL252x Version: 4.3 21


Basics communication

Fig. 6: eEtherCAT tab -> Advanced Settings -> Behavior -> Watchdog

Notes:
• the Multiplier Register 400h (hexadecimal, i.e. x0400) is valid for both watchdogs.
• each watchdog has its own timer setting 410h or 420h, which together with the Multiplier results in a
resulting time.
• important: the Multiplier/Timer setting is only loaded into the slave at EtherCAT startup if the checkbox
in front of it is activated.
• if it is not checked, nothing is downloaded and the setting located in the ESC remains unchanged.
• the downloaded values can be seen in the ESC registers x0400/0410/0420: ESC Access -> Memory

SM watchdog (SyncManager Watchdog)

The SyncManager watchdog is reset with each successful EtherCAT process data communication with the
terminal. If, for example, no EtherCAT process data communication with the terminal takes place for longer
than the set and activated SM watchdog time due to a line interruption, the watchdog is triggered. The status
of the terminal (usually OP) remains unaffected. The watchdog is only reset again by a successful EtherCAT
process data access.

The SyncManager watchdog is therefore a monitoring for correct and timely process data communication
with the ESC from the EtherCAT side.

The maximum possible watchdog time depends on the device. For example, for "simple" EtherCAT slaves
(without firmware) with watchdog execution in the ESC it is usually up to ~170 seconds. For "complex"
EtherCAT slaves (with firmware) the SM watchdog function is usually parameterized via Reg. 400/420 but
executed by the µC and can be significantly lower. In addition, the execution may then be subject to a certain
time uncertainty. Since the TwinCAT dialog may allow inputs up to 65535, a test of the desired watchdog
time is recommended.

22 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Basics communication

PDI watchdog (Process Data Watchdog)

If there is no PDI communication with the EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) for longer than the set and
activated PDI watchdog time, this watchdog is triggered.

PDI (Process Data Interface) is the internal interface of the ESC, e.g. to local processors in the EtherCAT
slave. With the PDI watchdog this communication can be monitored for failure.

The PDI watchdog is therefore a monitoring for correct and timely process data communication with the
ESC, but viewed from the application side.

Calculation

Watchdog time = [1/25 MHz * (Watchdog multiplier + 2) ] * PDI/SM watchdog

Example: default setting Multiplier=2498, SM watchdog=1000 -> 100 ms

The value in Multiplier + 2 corresponds to the number of 40ns base ticks representing one watchdog tick.

CAUTION
Undefined state possible!
The function for switching off of the SM watchdog via SM watchdog = 0 is only implemented in terminals
from version -0016. In previous versions this operating mode should not be used.

CAUTION
Damage of devices and undefined state possible!
If the SM watchdog is activated and a value of 0 is entered the watchdog switches off completely. This is
the deactivation of the watchdog! Set outputs are NOT set in a safe state if the communication is
interrupted.

4.4 EtherCAT State Machine


The state of the EtherCAT slave is controlled via the EtherCAT State Machine (ESM). Depending upon the
state, different functions are accessible or executable in the EtherCAT slave. Specific commands must be
sent by the EtherCAT master to the device in each state, particularly during the bootup of the slave.

A distinction is made between the following states:


• Init
• Pre-Operational
• Safe-Operational and
• Operational
• Boot

The regular state of each EtherCAT slave after bootup is the OP state.

EL252x Version: 4.3 23


Basics communication

Fig. 7: States of the EtherCAT State Machine

Init

After switch-on the EtherCAT slave in the Init state. No mailbox or process data communication is possible.
The EtherCAT master initializes sync manager channels 0 and 1 for mailbox communication.

Pre-Operational (Pre-Op)

During the transition between Init and Pre-Op the EtherCAT slave checks whether the mailbox was initialized
correctly.

In Pre-Op state mailbox communication is possible, but not process data communication. The EtherCAT
master initializes the sync manager channels for process data (from sync manager channel 2), the FMMU
channels and, if the slave supports configurable mapping, PDO mapping or the sync manager PDO
assignment. In this state the settings for the process data transfer and perhaps terminal-specific parameters
that may differ from the default settings are also transferred.

Safe-Operational (Safe-Op)

During transition between Pre-Op and Safe-Op the EtherCAT slave checks whether the sync manager
channels for process data communication and, if required, the distributed clocks settings are correct. Before
it acknowledges the change of state, the EtherCAT slave copies current input data into the associated DP-
RAM areas of the EtherCAT slave controller (ECSC).

In Safe-Op state mailbox and process data communication is possible, although the slave keeps its outputs
in a safe state, while the input data are updated cyclically.

Outputs in SAFEOP state


The default set watchdog [} 21] monitoring sets the outputs of the module in a safe state -
depending on the settings in SAFEOP and OP - e.g. in OFF state. If this is prevented by
deactivation of the watchdog monitoring in the module, the outputs can be switched or set also in
the SAFEOP state.

Operational (Op)

Before the EtherCAT master switches the EtherCAT slave from Safe-Op to Op it must transfer valid output
data.

24 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Basics communication

In the Op state the slave copies the output data of the masters to its outputs. Process data and mailbox
communication is possible.

Boot

In the Boot state the slave firmware can be updated. The Boot state can only be reached via the Init state.

In the Boot state mailbox communication via the file access over EtherCAT (FoE) protocol is possible, but no
other mailbox communication and no process data communication.

4.5 CoE Interface


General description

The CoE interface (CAN application protocol over EtherCAT)) is used for parameter management of
EtherCAT devices. EtherCAT slaves or the EtherCAT master manage fixed (read only) or variable
parameters which they require for operation, diagnostics or commissioning.

CoE parameters are arranged in a table hierarchy. In principle, the user has read access via the fieldbus.
The EtherCAT master (TwinCAT System Manager) can access the local CoE lists of the slaves via
EtherCAT in read or write mode, depending on the attributes.

Different CoE parameter types are possible, including string (text), integer numbers, Boolean values or larger
byte fields. They can be used to describe a wide range of features. Examples of such parameters include
manufacturer ID, serial number, process data settings, device name, calibration values for analog
measurement or passwords.

The order is specified in two levels via hexadecimal numbering: (main)index, followed by subindex. The
value ranges are
• Index: 0x0000 …0xFFFF (0...65535dec)
• SubIndex: 0x00…0xFF (0...255dec)

A parameter localized in this way is normally written as 0x8010:07, with preceding “0x” to identify the
hexadecimal numerical range and a colon between index and subindex.

The relevant ranges for EtherCAT fieldbus users are:


• 0x1000: This is where fixed identity information for the device is stored, including name, manufacturer,
serial number etc., plus information about the current and available process data configurations.
• 0x8000: This is where the operational and functional parameters for all channels are stored, such as
filter settings or output frequency.

Other important ranges are:


• 0x4000: here are the channel parameters for some EtherCAT devices. Historically, this was the first
parameter area before the 0x8000 area was introduced. EtherCAT devices that were previously
equipped with parameters in 0x4000 and changed to 0x8000 support both ranges for compatibility
reasons and mirror internally.
• 0x6000: Input PDOs (“input” from the perspective of the EtherCAT master)
• 0x7000: Output PDOs (“output” from the perspective of the EtherCAT master)

Availability
Not every EtherCAT device must have a CoE list. Simple I/O modules without dedicated processor
usually have no variable parameters and therefore no CoE list.

If a device has a CoE list, it is shown in the TwinCAT System Manager as a separate tab with a listing of the
elements:

EL252x Version: 4.3 25


Basics communication

Fig. 8: “CoE Online” tab

The figure above shows the CoE objects available in device “EL2502”, ranging from 0x1000 to 0x1600. The
subindices for 0x1018 are expanded.

NOTE
Changes in the CoE directory (CAN over EtherCAT), program access
When using/manipulating the CoE parameters observe the general CoE notes in chapter "CoE interface" of
the EtherCAT system documentation:
• Keep a startup list if components have to be replaced,
• Distinction between online/offline dictionary,
• Existence of current XML description (download from the Beckhoff website),
• "CoE-Reload" for resetting the changes
• Program access during operation via PLC (see TwinCAT3 | PLC Library: Tc2_EtherCAT and Example
program R/W CoE)

Data management and function “NoCoeStorage”

Some parameters, particularly the setting parameters of the slave, are configurable and writeable. This can
be done in write or read mode
• via the System Manager (Fig. “CoE Online” tab) by clicking
This is useful for commissioning of the system/slaves. Click on the row of the index to be
parameterized and enter a value in the “SetValue” dialog.
• from the control system/PLC via ADS, e.g. through blocks from the TcEtherCAT.lib library
This is recommended for modifications while the system is running or if no System Manager or
operating staff are available.

26 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Basics communication

Data management
If slave CoE parameters are modified online, Beckhoff devices store any changes in a fail-safe
manner in the EEPROM, i.e. the modified CoE parameters are still available after a restart.
The situation may be different with other manufacturers.

An EEPROM is subject to a limited lifetime with respect to write operations. From typically 100,000
write operations onwards it can no longer be guaranteed that new (changed) data are reliably saved
or are still readable. This is irrelevant for normal commissioning. However, if CoE parameters are
continuously changed via ADS at machine runtime, it is quite possible for the lifetime limit to be
reached. Support for the NoCoeStorage function, which suppresses the saving of changed CoE
values, depends on the firmware version.
Please refer to the technical data in this documentation as to whether this applies to the respective
device.
• If the function is supported: the function is activated by entering the code word 0x12345678 once
in CoE 0xF008 and remains active as long as the code word is not changed. After switching the
device on it is then inactive. Changed CoE values are not saved in the EEPROM and can thus
be changed any number of times.
• Function is not supported: continuous changing of CoE values is not permissible in view of the
lifetime limit.

Startup list
Changes in the local CoE list of the terminal are lost if the terminal is replaced. If a terminal is
replaced with a new Beckhoff terminal, it will have the default settings. It is therefore advisable to
link all changes in the CoE list of an EtherCAT slave with the Startup list of the slave, which is
processed whenever the EtherCAT fieldbus is started. In this way a replacement EtherCAT slave
can automatically be parameterized with the specifications of the user.
If EtherCAT slaves are used which are unable to store local CoE values permanently, the Startup
list must be used.

Recommended approach for manual modification of CoE parameters


• Make the required change in the System Manager
The values are stored locally in the EtherCAT slave
• If the value is to be stored permanently, enter it in the Startup list.
The order of the Startup entries is usually irrelevant.

Fig. 9: Startup list in the TwinCAT System Manager

The Startup list may already contain values that were configured by the System Manager based on the ESI
specifications. Additional application-specific entries can be created.

Online/offline list

While working with the TwinCAT System Manager, a distinction has to be made whether the EtherCAT
device is “available”, i.e. switched on and linked via EtherCAT and therefore online, or whether a
configuration is created offline without connected slaves.

EL252x Version: 4.3 27


Basics communication

In both cases a CoE list as shown in Fig. “CoE online tab” is displayed. The connectivity is shown as offline/
online.
• If the slave is offline
◦ The offline list from the ESI file is displayed. In this case modifications are not meaningful or
possible.
◦ The configured status is shown under Identity.
◦ No firmware or hardware version is displayed, since these are features of the physical device.
◦ Offline is shown in red.

Fig. 10: Offline list

• If the slave is online


◦ The actual current slave list is read. This may take several seconds, depending on the size and
cycle time.
◦ The actual identity is displayed
◦ The firmware and hardware version of the equipment according to the electronic information is
displayed
◦ Online is shown in green.

28 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Basics communication

Fig. 11: Online list

Channel-based order

The CoE list is available in EtherCAT devices that usually feature several functionally equivalent channels.
For example, a 4-channel analog 0...10 V input terminal also has four logical channels and therefore four
identical sets of parameter data for the channels. In order to avoid having to list each channel in the
documentation, the placeholder “n” tends to be used for the individual channel numbers.

In the CoE system 16 indices, each with 255 subindices, are generally sufficient for representing all channel
parameters. The channel-based order is therefore arranged in 16dec/10hex steps. The parameter range
0x8000 exemplifies this:
• Channel 0: parameter range 0x8000:00 ... 0x800F:255
• Channel 1: parameter range 0x8010:00 ... 0x801F:255
• Channel 2: parameter range 0x8020:00 ... 0x802F:255
• ...

This is generally written as 0x80n0.

Detailed information on the CoE interface can be found in the EtherCAT system documentation on the
Beckhoff website.

EL252x Version: 4.3 29


Basics communication

4.6 Distributed Clock


The distributed clock represents a local clock in the EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) with the following
characteristics:
• Unit 1 ns
• Zero point 1.1.2000 00:00
• Size 64 bit (sufficient for the next 584 years; however, some EtherCAT slaves only offer 32-bit support,
i.e. the variable overflows after approx. 4.2 seconds)
• The EtherCAT master automatically synchronizes the local clock with the master clock in the EtherCAT
bus with a precision of < 100 ns.

For detailed information please refer to the EtherCAT system description.

30 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5 Mounting and Wiring

5.1 Instructions for ESD protection


NOTE
Destruction of the devices by electrostatic discharge possible!
The devices contain components at risk from electrostatic discharge caused by improper handling.
• Please ensure you are electrostatically discharged and avoid touching the contacts of the device directly.
• Avoid contact with highly insulating materials (synthetic fibers, plastic film etc.).
• Surroundings (working place, packaging and personnel) should by grounded probably, when handling
with the devices.
• Each assembly must be terminated at the right hand end with an EL9011 or EL9012 bus end cap, to
ensure the protection class and ESD protection.

Fig. 12: Spring contacts of the Beckhoff I/O components

EL252x Version: 4.3 31


Mounting and Wiring

5.2 Explosion protection

5.2.1 ATEX - Special conditions (standard temperature range)


WARNING
Observe the special conditions for the intended use of Beckhoff fieldbus components with
standard temperature range in potentially explosive areas (directive 2014/34/EU)!
• The certified components are to be installed in a suitable housing that guarantees a protection class of at
least IP54 in accordance with EN 60079-15! The environmental conditions during use are thereby to be
taken into account!
• For dust (only the fieldbus components of certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9): The equipment
shall be installed in a suitable enclosure providing a degree of protection of IP54 according to
EN 60079-31 for group IIIA or IIIB and IP6X for group IIIC, taking into account the environmental
conditions under which the equipment is used!
• If the temperatures during rated operation are higher than 70°C at the feed-in points of cables, lines or
pipes, or higher than 80°C at the wire branching points, then cables must be selected whose
temperature data correspond to the actual measured temperature values!
• Observe the permissible ambient temperature range of 0 to 55°C for the use of Beckhoff fieldbus
components standard temperature range in potentially explosive areas!
• Measures must be taken to protect against the rated operating voltage being exceeded by more than
40% due to short-term interference voltages!
• The individual terminals may only be unplugged or removed from the Bus Terminal system if the supply
voltage has been switched off or if a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!
• The connections of the certified components may only be connected or disconnected if the supply
voltage has been switched off or if a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!
• The fuses of the KL92xx/EL92xx power feed terminals may only be exchanged if the supply voltage has
been switched off or if a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!
• Address selectors and ID switches may only be adjusted if the supply voltage has been switched off or if
a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!

Standards

The fundamental health and safety requirements are fulfilled by compliance with the following standards:
• EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013
• EN 60079-15:2010
• EN 60079-31:2013 (only for certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9)

Marking

The Beckhoff fieldbus components with standard temperature range certified according to the ATEX directive
for potentially explosive areas bear one of the following markings:

II 3G KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Ta: 0 … +55°C


II 3D KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc Ta: 0 ... +55°C
(only for fieldbus components of certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9)
or

II 3G KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc Ta: 0 … +55°C


II 3D KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc Ta: 0 ... +55°C
(only for fieldbus components of certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9)

32 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5.2.2 ATEX - Special conditions (extended temperature range)


WARNING
Observe the special conditions for the intended use of Beckhoff fieldbus components with
extended temperature range (ET) in potentially explosive areas (directive 2014/34/EU)!
• The certified components are to be installed in a suitable housing that guarantees a protection class of at
least IP54 in accordance with EN 60079-15! The environmental conditions during use are thereby to be
taken into account!
• For dust (only the fieldbus components of certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9): The equipment
shall be installed in a suitable enclosure providing a degree of protection of IP54 according to
EN 60079-31 for group IIIA or IIIB and IP6X for group IIIC, taking into account the environmental
conditions under which the equipment is used!
• If the temperatures during rated operation are higher than 70°C at the feed-in points of cables, lines or
pipes, or higher than 80°C at the wire branching points, then cables must be selected whose
temperature data correspond to the actual measured temperature values!
• Observe the permissible ambient temperature range of -25 to 60°C for the use of Beckhoff fieldbus
components with extended temperature range (ET) in potentially explosive areas!
• Measures must be taken to protect against the rated operating voltage being exceeded by more than
40% due to short-term interference voltages!
• The individual terminals may only be unplugged or removed from the Bus Terminal system if the supply
voltage has been switched off or if a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!
• The connections of the certified components may only be connected or disconnected if the supply
voltage has been switched off or if a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!
• The fuses of the KL92xx/EL92xx power feed terminals may only be exchanged if the supply voltage has
been switched off or if a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!
• Address selectors and ID switches may only be adjusted if the supply voltage has been switched off or if
a non-explosive atmosphere is ensured!

Standards

The fundamental health and safety requirements are fulfilled by compliance with the following standards:
• EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013
• EN 60079-15:2010
• EN 60079-31:2013 (only for certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9)

Marking

The Beckhoff fieldbus components with extended temperature range (ET) certified according to the ATEX
directive for potentially explosive areas bear the following marking:

II 3G KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Ta: -25 … +60°C


II 3D KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc Ta: -25 ... +60°C
(only for fieldbus components of certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9)
or

II 3G KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc Ta: -25 … +60°C


II 3D KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc Ta: -25 ... +60°C
(only for fieldbus components of certificate no. KEMA 10ATEX0075 X Issue 9)

EL252x Version: 4.3 33


Mounting and Wiring

5.2.3 Continuative documentation for ATEX and IECEx


NOTE
Continuative documentation about explosion protection according to ATEX
and IECEx
Pay also attention to the continuative documentation
Ex. Protection for Terminal Systems
Notes on the use of the Beckhoff terminal systems in hazardous areas according to ATEX
and IECEx,
that is available for download within the download area of your product on the Beckhoff
homepage www.beckhoff.com!

34 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5.3 UL notice
CAUTION
Application
Beckhoff EtherCAT modules are intended for use with Beckhoff’s UL Listed EtherCAT
System only.

CAUTION
Examination
For cULus examination, the Beckhoff I/O System has only been investigated for risk of fire
and electrical shock (in accordance with UL508 and CSA C22.2 No. 142).

CAUTION
For devices with Ethernet connectors
Not for connection to telecommunication circuits.

Basic principles

UL certification according to UL508. Devices with this kind of certification are marked by this sign:

EL252x Version: 4.3 35


Mounting and Wiring

5.4 Installation on mounting rails


WARNING
Risk of electric shock and damage of device!
Bring the bus terminal system into a safe, powered down state before starting installation, disassembly or
wiring of the bus terminals!

Assembly

Fig. 13: Attaching on mounting rail

The bus coupler and bus terminals are attached to commercially available 35 mm mounting rails (DIN rails
according to EN 60715) by applying slight pressure:

1. First attach the fieldbus coupler to the mounting rail.


2. The bus terminals are now attached on the right-hand side of the fieldbus coupler. Join the
components with tongue and groove and push the terminals against the mounting rail, until the lock
clicks onto the mounting rail.
If the terminals are clipped onto the mounting rail first and then pushed together without tongue and
groove, the connection will not be operational! When correctly assembled, no significant gap should
be visible between the housings.

Fixing of mounting rails


The locking mechanism of the terminals and couplers extends to the profile of the mounting rail. At
the installation, the locking mechanism of the components must not come into conflict with the fixing
bolts of the mounting rail. To mount the mounting rails with a height of 7.5 mm under the terminals
and couplers, you should use flat mounting connections (e.g. countersunk screws or blind rivets).

36 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

Disassembly

Fig. 14: Disassembling of terminal

Each terminal is secured by a lock on the mounting rail, which must be released for disassembly:

1. Pull the terminal by its orange-colored lugs approximately 1 cm away from the mounting rail. In doing
so for this terminal the mounting rail lock is released automatically and you can pull the terminal out of
the bus terminal block easily without excessive force.
2. Grasp the released terminal with thumb and index finger simultaneous at the upper and lower grooved
housing surfaces and pull the terminal out of the bus terminal block.

Connections within a bus terminal block

The electric connections between the Bus Coupler and the Bus Terminals are automatically realized by
joining the components:
• The six spring contacts of the K-Bus/E-Bus deal with the transfer of the data and the supply of the Bus
Terminal electronics.
• The power contacts deal with the supply for the field electronics and thus represent a supply rail within
the bus terminal block. The power contacts are supplied via terminals on the Bus Coupler (up to 24 V)
or for higher voltages via power feed terminals.

Power Contacts
During the design of a bus terminal block, the pin assignment of the individual Bus Terminals must
be taken account of, since some types (e.g. analog Bus Terminals or digital 4-channel Bus
Terminals) do not or not fully loop through the power contacts. Power Feed Terminals (KL91xx,
KL92xx or EL91xx, EL92xx) interrupt the power contacts and thus represent the start of a new
supply rail.

PE power contact

The power contact labeled PE can be used as a protective earth. For safety reasons this contact mates first
when plugging together, and can ground short-circuit currents of up to 125 A.

EL252x Version: 4.3 37


Mounting and Wiring

Fig. 15: Power contact on left side

NOTE
Possible damage of the device
Note that, for reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, the PE contacts are capacitatively coupled to the
mounting rail. This may lead to incorrect results during insulation testing or to damage on the terminal (e.g.
disruptive discharge to the PE line during insulation testing of a consumer with a nominal voltage of 230 V).
For insulation testing, disconnect the PE supply line at the Bus Coupler or the Power Feed Terminal! In
order to decouple further feed points for testing, these Power Feed Terminals can be released and pulled at
least 10 mm from the group of terminals.

WARNING
Risk of electric shock!
The PE power contact must not be used for other potentials!

38 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5.5 Installation instructions for enhanced mechanical


load capacity
WARNING
Risk of injury through electric shock and damage to the device!
Bring the Bus Terminal system into a safe, de-energized state before starting mounting, disassembly or
wiring of the Bus Terminals!

Additional checks

The terminals have undergone the following additional tests:


Verification Explanation
Vibration 10 frequency runs in 3 axes
6 Hz < f < 60 Hz displacement 0.35 mm, constant amplitude
60.1 Hz < f < 500 Hz acceleration 5 g, constant amplitude
Shocks 1000 shocks in each direction, in 3 axes
25 g, 6 ms

Additional installation instructions

For terminals with enhanced mechanical load capacity, the following additional installation instructions apply:
• The enhanced mechanical load capacity is valid for all permissible installation positions
• Use a mounting rail according to EN 60715 TH35-15
• Fix the terminal segment on both sides of the mounting rail with a mechanical fixture, e.g. an earth
terminal or reinforced end clamp
• The maximum total extension of the terminal segment (without coupler) is:
64 terminals (12 mm mounting with) or 32 terminals (24 mm mounting with)
• Avoid deformation, twisting, crushing and bending of the mounting rail during edging and installation of
the rail
• The mounting points of the mounting rail must be set at 5 cm intervals
• Use countersunk head screws to fasten the mounting rail
• The free length between the strain relief and the wire connection should be kept as short as possible. A
distance of approx. 10 cm should be maintained to the cable duct.

EL252x Version: 4.3 39


Mounting and Wiring

5.6 Connection

5.6.1 Connection system


WARNING
Risk of electric shock and damage of device!
Bring the bus terminal system into a safe, powered down state before starting installation, disassembly or
wiring of the bus terminals!

Overview

The bus terminal system offers different connection options for optimum adaptation to the respective
application:
• The terminals of ELxxxx and KLxxxx series with standard wiring include electronics and connection
level in a single enclosure.
• The terminals of ESxxxx and KSxxxx series feature a pluggable connection level and enable steady
wiring while replacing.
• The High Density Terminals (HD Terminals) include electronics and connection level in a single
enclosure and have advanced packaging density.

Standard wiring (ELxxxx / KLxxxx)

Fig. 16: Standard wiring

The terminals of ELxxxx and KLxxxx series have been tried and tested for years.
They feature integrated screwless spring force technology for fast and simple assembly.

Pluggable wiring (ESxxxx / KSxxxx)

Fig. 17: Pluggable wiring

The terminals of ESxxxx and KSxxxx series feature a pluggable connection level.
The assembly and wiring procedure is the same as for the ELxxxx and KLxxxx series.
The pluggable connection level enables the complete wiring to be removed as a plug connector from the top
of the housing for servicing.
The lower section can be removed from the terminal block by pulling the unlocking tab.
Insert the new component and plug in the connector with the wiring. This reduces the installation time and
eliminates the risk of wires being mixed up.

The familiar dimensions of the terminal only had to be changed slightly. The new connector adds about 3
mm. The maximum height of the terminal remains unchanged.

40 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

A tab for strain relief of the cable simplifies assembly in many applications and prevents tangling of individual
connection wires when the connector is removed.

Conductor cross sections between 0.08 mm2 and 2.5 mm2 can continue to be used with the proven spring
force technology.

The overview and nomenclature of the product names for ESxxxx and KSxxxx series has been retained as
known from ELxxxx and KLxxxx series.

High Density Terminals (HD Terminals)

Fig. 18: High Density Terminals

The terminals from these series with 16 terminal points are distinguished by a particularly compact design,
as the packaging density is twice as large as that of the standard 12 mm bus terminals. Massive conductors
and conductors with a wire end sleeve can be inserted directly into the spring loaded terminal point without
tools.

Wiring HD Terminals
The High Density Terminals of the ELx8xx and KLx8xx series doesn't support pluggable wiring.

Ultrasonically “bonded” (ultrasonically welded) conductors

Ultrasonically “bonded” conductors


It is also possible to connect the Standard and High Density Terminals with ultrasonically “bonded”
(ultrasonically welded) conductors. In this case, please note the tables concerning the wire-size
width [} 42]!

EL252x Version: 4.3 41


Mounting and Wiring

5.6.2 Wiring
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and damage of device!
Bring the bus terminal system into a safe, powered down state before starting installation, disassembly or
wiring of the bus terminals!

Terminals for standard wiring ELxxxx/KLxxxx and for pluggable wiring ESxxxx/KSxxxx

Fig. 19: Connecting a cable on a terminal point

Up to eight terminal points enable the connection of solid or finely stranded cables to the bus terminal. The
terminal points are implemented in spring force technology. Connect the cables as follows:

1. Open a terminal point by pushing a screwdriver straight against the stop into the square opening
above the terminal point. Do not turn the screwdriver or move it alternately (don't toggle).
2. The wire can now be inserted into the round terminal opening without any force.
3. The terminal point closes automatically when the pressure is released, holding the wire securely and
permanently.

See the following table for the suitable wire size width.
Terminal housing ELxxxx, KLxxxx ESxxxx, KSxxxx
Wire size width (single core wires) 0.08 ... 2.5 mm2 0.08 ... 2.5 mm2
Wire size width (fine-wire conductors) 0.08 ... 2.5 mm2 0.08 ... 2.5 mm2
Wire size width (conductors with a wire end sleeve) 0.14 ... 1.5 mm2 0.14 ... 1.5 mm2
Wire stripping length 8 ... 9 mm 9 ... 10 mm

High Density Terminals (HD Terminals [} 41]) with 16 terminal points

The conductors of the HD Terminals are connected without tools for single-wire conductors using the direct
plug-in technique, i.e. after stripping the wire is simply plugged into the terminal point. The cables are
released, as usual, using the contact release with the aid of a screwdriver. See the following table for the
suitable wire size width.

42 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

Terminal housing High Density Housing


Wire size width (single core wires) 0.08 ... 1.5 mm2
Wire size width (fine-wire conductors) 0.25 ... 1.5 mm2
Wire size width (conductors with a wire end sleeve) 0.14 ... 0.75 mm2
Wire size width (ultrasonically “bonded" conductors) only 1.5 mm2 (see notice [} 41])
Wire stripping length 8 ... 9 mm

5.6.3 Shielding
Shielding
Encoder, analog sensors and actuators should always be connected with shielded, twisted paired
wires.

5.7 Note - Power supply


WARNING
Power supply from SELV/PELV power supply unit!
SELV/PELV circuits (Safety Extra Low Voltage, Protective Extra Low Voltage) according to
IEC 61010-2-201 must be used to supply this device.
Notes:
• SELV/PELV circuits may give rise to further requirements from standards such as IEC 60204-1 et al, for
example with regard to cable spacing and insulation.
• A SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) supply provides safe electrical isolation and limitation of the voltage
without a connection to the protective conductor,
a PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) supply also requires a safe connection to the protective
conductor.

EL252x Version: 4.3 43


Mounting and Wiring

5.8 EL2521-xxxx - LEDs and connection

5.8.1 EL2521

Fig. 20: EL2521 connection and wiring example

Connection EL2521
Terminal point Description
Name No.
Output +A 1 Output +A
Output +B 2 Output +B
Input T 3 Input T
T.Z. GND/T.Z. Ref. GND 4 Signal ground for the outputs
Output -A 5 Output -A
Output -B 6 Output -B
Input Z 7 Input Z
Shield 8 Shield

LEDs EL2521
LED Color Meaning
Output A, B green The illumination of the LEDs for the active frequency outputs A or B at higher frequencies can only be perceived
as a glow at half brightness
Input T, Z green Lights up when a signal is present
RUN green This LED indicates the terminal's operating state:
off State of the EtherCAT State Machine: INIT = initialization of the terminal
flashing State of the EtherCAT State Machine: PREOP = function for mailbox communication and
different default settings set
Single flash State of the EtherCAT State Machine: SAFEOP = verification of the Sync Manager channels
Outputs remain in safe state
on State of the EtherCAT State Machine: OP = normal operating state; mailbox and process data
communication is possible
flickering/ State of the EtherCAT State Machine: BOOTSTRAP = function for firmware updates [} 225]
rapidly flashing

44 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5.8.2 EL2521-0024

Fig. 21: EL2521-0024 pin assignment and sample connection

Connection EL2521-0024
Terminal point Description
Name No.
Output +A 1 Output +A
Output +B 2 Output +B
Input T 3 Input T
T.Z. GND/T.Z. Ref. GND 4 Signal ground for the outputs
Output -A 5 Output -A
Output -B 6 Output -B
Input Z 7 Input Z
Shield 8 Shield

LEDs EL2521-0024
LED Color Meaning
Output A, B green The illumination of the LEDs for the active frequency outputs A or B at higher frequencies can only
be perceived as a glow at half brightness
Input T, Z green Lights up when a signal is present
RUN green This LED indicates the terminal's operating state:
off State of the EtherCAT State Machine: INIT = initialization of the terminal
flashing State of the EtherCAT State Machine: PREOP = function for mailbox
communication and different default settings set
Single flash State of the EtherCAT State Machine: SAFEOP = verification of the Sync
Manager channels
Outputs remain in safe state
on State of the EtherCAT State Machine: OP = normal operating state; mailbox
and process data communication is possible
flickering/ State of the EtherCAT State Machine: BOOTSTRAP = function for firmware
rapidly flashing updates [} 225]

EL252x Version: 4.3 45


Mounting and Wiring

5.8.3 EL2521-0124

Fig. 22: EL2521-0124 pin assignment and sample connection

Connection EL2521-0124
Terminal point Description
Name No.
Output +A 1 Output +A
Output +B 2 Output +B
Latch24 V 3 24 V latch input
Latch/Output GND 4 Signal ground for the outputs
Ref. GND and for the latch input
Output -A 5 Output -A
Output -B 6 Output -B
Output 24 V 7 24 V output
Shield 8 Shield

LEDs EL2521-0124
LED Color Meaning
Output A, B green The illumination of the LEDs for the active frequency outputs A or B at higher frequencies can only be perceived
as a glow at half brightness
Latch/ green Lights up when a signal is present
Output 24 V
RUN green This LED indicates the terminal's operating state:
off State of the EtherCAT State Machine: INIT = initialization of the terminal
flashing State of the EtherCAT State Machine: PREOP = function for mailbox communication and
different default settings set
Single flash State of the EtherCAT State Machine: SAFEOP = verification of the Sync Manager channels
Outputs remain in safe state
on State of the EtherCAT State Machine: OP = normal operating state; mailbox and process data
communication is possible
flickering/ State of the EtherCAT State Machine: BOOTSTRAP = function for firmware updates [} 225]
rapidly flashing

46 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5.8.4 EL2521-0025

Fig. 23: EL2521-0025 pin assignment and sample connection

Connection EL2521-0025
Terminal point Description
Name No.
Output -A 1 Output -A
Output -B 2 Output -B
Input T 3 Input T
T.Z. GND/T.Z. Ref. GND 4 Signal ground for the outputs
Output +A 5 Output +A
Output +B 6 Output +B
Input Z 7 Input Z
Shield 8 Shield

LEDs EL2521-0025
LED Color Meaning
Output A, B green The illumination of the LEDs for the active frequency outputs A or B at higher frequencies can only
be perceived as a glow at half brightness
Input T, Z green Lights up when a signal is present
RUN green This LED indicates the terminal's operating state:
off State of the EtherCAT State Machine: INIT = initialization of the terminal
flashing State of the EtherCAT State Machine: PREOP = function for mailbox
communication and different default settings set
Single flash State of the EtherCAT State Machine: SAFEOP = verification of the Sync
Manager channels
Outputs remain in safe state
on State of the EtherCAT State Machine: OP = normal operating state; mailbox
and process data communication is possible
flickering/ State of the EtherCAT State Machine: BOOTSTRAP = function for Firmware
rapidly flashing Update EL/ES/EM/ELM/EPxxxx [} 225]

EL252x Version: 4.3 47


Mounting and Wiring

5.8.5 Connecting the inputs


The optically isolated inputs are protected from overload by a current limitation. Without further external
circuit the operating voltage may lie between 5 and 24 VDC. The GND connection is the common ground of
the two inputs T and Z. The circuit diagram shows the internal circuit of the two inputs:

Fig. 24: Internal circuit of the inputs T and Z

5.8.6 Connection of the outputs


Circuit examples for output to A. The same principles apply to output B.

EL2521

The outputs A and B of the EL2521 can be used in different connection modes. An integrated DC/DC
converter supplies the output stage of the two channels, A and B, with an electrically isolated 5 V power
supply.
• Connection to RS422 receiver

The output can be operated as an RS422 output. The circuit generates the necessary differential signals.

Fig. 25: EL2521 on the RS422 Receiver

• Connection to optocoupler (without external supply voltage)

The outputs can be used for direct connection of an optocoupler. The output stage supplies the necessary
output current using an internal 5 V supply voltage.

Fig. 26: EL2521, direct connection to an optocoupler

48 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

EL2521-0024, EL2521-0124

The operation with an external supply voltage depends on the hardware version of the terminal:
• Connection to optocoupler (with external supply voltage)

For connection to inputs with a large input resistance, an external supply voltage (up to 24 V) can be used
with the EL2521-0024 in order to create the necessary current.

Fig. 27: EL2521-0x24, wiring with external power source

NOTE
EL2521-0124 ground potential
In the case of the EL2521-0124 the outputs -A and -B must be connected to the signal ground (pin 4) in
order to avoid damage to the terminal (see fig. EL2521-0124 pin assignment and sample connection [} 46])!

EL2521-0025

NOTE
Logic reversal with the EL2521-0025
When connecting the EL2521-0025, observe the logic reversal with the wiring (see fig. EL2521-0025 pin
assignment and sample connection [} 47])!

• Connection to optocoupler (with external supply voltage)

For connection to inputs with a large input resistance, an external supply voltage (up to 24 V) can be used
with the EL2521-0025 in order to create the necessary current. Due to the logic reversal, the positive voltage
for driving the output current is to be connected to pin 5 or pin 6.

Fig. 28: EL2521-0025, wiring with external power source, logic reversal

EL252x Version: 4.3 49


Mounting and Wiring

5.9 EL2522 - LEDs and connection

Fig. 29: EL2522 connection and wiring example

EL2522 connection
Terminal point Description
Name No.
Output A1+ 1 Output A1+
Output B1+ 2 Output B1+
not connected 3 not connected
Shield 4 Shield, internally connected to pins 8, 12 and 16
Output A2+, C1+ 5 Output A2+, C1+
Output B2+ 6 Output B2+
not connected 7 not connected
Shield 8 Shield, internally connected to pins 4, 12 and 16
Output A1- 9 Output A1-
Output B1- 10 Output B1-
GND 11 *) from hardware version 04 [} 223]:
GND of the outputs for occasional equipotential bonding
Shield 12 Shield, internally connected to pins 4, 8 and 16
Output A2-, C1- 13 Output A2-, C1-
Output B2- 14 Output B2-
GND 15 *) from hardware version 04 [} 223]:
GND of the outputs for occasional equipotential bonding
Shield 16 Shield, internally connected to pins 4, 8 and 12

50 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

LEDs EL2522
LED Color Meaning
Output A1, A2, green The LED for the active frequency output A1, A2, B1, B2 or C1; can only be perceived as a glow at half
B1, B2, C1 brightness at higher frequencies.
The five LEDs (A2, A2, B1, B2, C1) flash green when UP (voltage supply of the power contacts) is not
available.
RUN green This LED indicates the terminal's operating state:
off State of the EtherCAT State Machine: INIT = initialization of the terminal
flashing State of the EtherCAT State Machine: PREOP = function for mailbox communication and
different default settings set
Single flash State of the EtherCAT State Machine: SAFEOP = verification of the Sync Manager channels
Outputs remain in safe state
on State of the EtherCAT State Machine: OP = normal operating state; mailbox and process
data communication is possible
flickering/ State of the EtherCAT State Machine: BOOTSTRAP = function for firmware updates [} 225]
rapidly flashing

EL252x Version: 4.3 51


Mounting and Wiring

5.10 Installation positions


NOTE
Constraints regarding installation position and operating temperature range
Please refer to the technical data for a terminal to ascertain whether any restrictions regarding the
installation position and/or the operating temperature range have been specified. When installing high
power dissipation terminals ensure that an adequate spacing is maintained between other components
above and below the terminal in order to guarantee adequate ventilation!

Optimum installation position (standard)

The optimum installation position requires the mounting rail to be installed horizontally and the connection
surfaces of the EL/KL terminals to face forward (see Fig. Recommended distances for standard installation
position). The terminals are ventilated from below, which enables optimum cooling of the electronics through
convection. “From below” is relative to the acceleration of gravity.

Fig. 30: Recommended distances for standard installation position

Compliance with the distances shown in Fig. Recommended distances for standard installation position is
recommended.

Other installation positions

All other installation positions are characterized by different spatial arrangement of the mounting rail - see
Fig Other installation positions.

The minimum distances to ambient specified above also apply to these installation positions.

52 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

Fig. 31: Other installation positions

EL252x Version: 4.3 53


Mounting and Wiring

5.11 Positioning of passive Terminals


Hint for positioning of passive terminals in the bus terminal block
EtherCAT Terminals (ELxxxx / ESxxxx), which do not take an active part in data transfer within the
bus terminal block are so called passive terminals. The passive terminals have no current
consumption out of the E-Bus.
To ensure an optimal data transfer, you must not directly string together more than two passive
terminals!

Examples for positioning of passive terminals (highlighted)

Fig. 32: Correct positioning

Fig. 33: Incorrect positioning

54 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Mounting and Wiring

5.12 Disposal
Products marked with a crossed-out wheeled bin shall not be discarded
with the normal waste stream. The device is considered as waste
electrical and electronic equipment. The national regulations for the
disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment must be observed.

EL252x Version: 4.3 55


Commissioning

6 Commissioning

6.1 TwinCAT Quick Start


TwinCAT is a development environment for real-time control including a multi PLC system, NC axis control,
programming and operation. The whole system is mapped through this environment and enables access to a
programming environment (including compilation) for the controller. Individual digital or analog inputs or
outputs can also be read or written directly, in order to verify their functionality, for example.

For further information, please refer to http://infosys.beckhoff.com:


• EtherCAT System Manual:
Fieldbus Components → EtherCAT Terminals → EtherCAT System Documentation → Setup in the
TwinCAT System Manager
• TwinCAT 2 → TwinCAT System Manager → I/O Configuration
• In particular, for TwinCAT – driver installation:
Fieldbus components → Fieldbus Cards and Switches → FC900x – PCI Cards for Ethernet →
Installation

Devices contain the relevant terminals for the actual configuration. All configuration data can be entered
directly via editor functions (offline) or via the `scan function (online):
• “offline”: The configuration can be customized by adding and positioning individual components.
These can be selected from a directory and configured.
◦ The procedure for the offline mode can be found under http://infosys.beckhoff.com:
TwinCAT 2 → TwinCAT System Manager → IO Configuration → Add an I/O device
• “online”: The existing hardware configuration is read
◦ See also http://infosys.beckhoff.com:
Fieldbus components → Fieldbus Cards and Switches → FC900x – PCI Cards for Ethernet →
Installation → Searching for devices

The following relationship is envisaged between the user PC and individual control elements:

56 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 34: Relationship between user side (commissioning) and installation

Insertion of certain components (I/O device, terminal, box...) by users functions the same way as in
TwinCAT 2 and TwinCAT 3. The descriptions below relate solely to the online procedure.

Example configuration (actual configuration)

Based on the following example configuration, the subsequent subsections describe the procedure for
TwinCAT 2 and TwinCAT 3:
• CX2040 control system (PLC) including CX2100-0004 power supply unit
• Connected to CX2040 on the right (E-bus):
EL1004 (4-channel digital input terminal 24 VDC)
• Linked via the X001 port (RJ-45): EK1100 EtherCAT Coupler
• Connected to the EK1100 EtherCAT Coupler on the right (E-bus):
EL2008 (8-channel digital output terminal 24 VDC; 0.5 A)
• (Optional via X000: a link to an external PC for the user interface)

EL252x Version: 4.3 57


Commissioning

Fig. 35: Control configuration with Embedded PC, input (EL1004) and output (EL2008)

Note that all combinations of a configuration are possible; for example, the EL1004 terminal could also be
connected after the coupler, or the EL2008 terminal could additionally be connected to the CX2040 on the
right, in which case the EK1100 coupler wouldn’t be necessary.

58 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.1.1 TwinCAT 2

Startup

TwinCAT 2 basically uses two user interfaces: the TwinCAT System Manager for communication with the
electromechanical components and TwinCAT PLC Control for the development and compilation of a
controller. The starting point is the TwinCAT System Manager.

After successful installation of the TwinCAT system on the PC to be used for development, the TwinCAT 2
System Manager displays the following user interface after startup:

Fig. 36: Initial TwinCAT 2 user interface

Generally, TwinCAT can be used in local or remote mode. Once the TwinCAT system, including the user
interface (standard) is installed on the respective PLC, TwinCAT can be used in local mode and thus the
next step is “Insert Device [} 61]”.

If the intention is to address the TwinCAT runtime environment installed on a PLC remotely from another
system used as a development environment, the target system must be made known first. In the menu under

“Actions” → “Choose Target System...”, the following window is opened for this via the symbol “ ” or the
“F8” key:

EL252x Version: 4.3 59


Commissioning

Fig. 37: Selection of the target system

Use “Search (Ethernet)...” to enter the target system. Thus another dialog opens to either:
• enter the known computer name after “Enter Host Name / IP:” (as shown in red)
• perform a “Broadcast Search” (if the exact computer name is not known)
• enter the known computer – IP or AmsNetID

Fig. 38: specify the PLC for access by the TwinCAT System Manager: selection of the target system

Once the target system has been entered, it is available for selection as follows (a correct password may
have to be entered before this):

After confirmation with “OK”, the target system can be accessed via the System Manager.

60 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Adding devices

In the configuration tree of the TwinCAT 2 System Manager user interface on the left, select “I/O Devices”
and then right-click to open a context menu and select “Scan Devices…”, or start the action in the menu bar

via . The TwinCAT System Manager may first have to be set to “Config Mode” via or via the
menu
“Actions” → “Set/Reset TwinCAT to Config Mode…” (Shift + F4).

Fig. 39: Select “Scan Devices...”

Confirm the warning message, which follows, and select the “EtherCAT” devices in the dialog:

Fig. 40: Automatic detection of I/O devices: selection of the devices to be integrated

Confirm the message “Find new boxes”, in order to determine the terminals connected to the devices. “Free
Run” enables manipulation of input and output values in “Config Mode” and should also be acknowledged.

Based on the example configuration [} 57] described at the beginning of this section, the result is as follows:

EL252x Version: 4.3 61


Commissioning

Fig. 41: Mapping of the configuration in the TwinCAT 2 System Manager

The whole process consists of two stages, which can also be performed separately (first determine the
devices, then determine the connected elements such as boxes, terminals, etc.). A scan (search function)
can also be initiated by selecting “Device ...” from the context menu, which then only reads the elements
below which are present in the configuration:

Fig. 42: Reading of individual terminals connected to a device

This functionality is useful if the actual configuration is modified at short notice.

Programming and integrating the PLC

TwinCAT PLC Control is the development environment for generating the controller in different program
environments: TwinCAT PLC Control supports all languages described in IEC 61131-3. There are two text-
based languages and three graphical languages.
• Text-based languages
◦ Instruction List (IL)

62 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

◦ Structured Text (ST)


• Graphical languages
◦ Function Block Diagram (FBD)
◦ Ladder Diagram (LD)
◦ The Continuous Function Chart Editor (CFC)
◦ Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

The following section refers solely to Structured Text (ST).

After starting TwinCAT PLC Control, the following user interface is shown for an initial project:

Fig. 43: TwinCAT PLC Control after startup

Example variables and an example program have been created and stored under the name
“PLC_example.pro”:

EL252x Version: 4.3 63


Commissioning

Fig. 44: Example program with variables after a compile process (without variable integration)

Warning 1990 (missing “VAR_CONFIG”) after a compile process indicates that the variables defined as
external (with the ID “AT%I*” or “AT%Q*”) have not been assigned. After successful compilation, TwinCAT
PLC Control creates a “*.tpy” file in the directory in which the project was stored. This file (“*.tpy”) contains
variable assignments and is not known to the System Manager, hence the warning. Once the System
Manager has been notified, the warning no longer appears.

First, integrate the TwinCAT PLC Control project in the System Manager. This is performed via the context
menu of the PLC configuration (right-click) and selecting “Append PLC Project…”:

Fig. 45: Appending the TwinCAT PLC Control project

64 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Select the PLC configuration “PLC_example.tpy” in the browser window that opens. The project including the
two variables identified with “AT” are then integrated in the configuration tree of the System Manager:

Fig. 46: PLC project integrated in the PLC configuration of the System Manager

The two variables “bEL1004_Ch4” and “nEL2008_value” can now be assigned to certain process objects of
the I/O configuration.

Assigning variables

Open a window for selecting a suitable process object (PDO) via the context menu of a variable of the
integrated project “PLC_example” and via “Modify Link...” “Standard”:

Fig. 47: Creating the links between PLC variables and process objects

In the window that opens, the process object for the “bEL1004_Ch4” BOOL-type variable can be selected
from the PLC configuration tree:

EL252x Version: 4.3 65


Commissioning

Fig. 48: Selecting BOOL-type PDO

According to the default setting, only certain PDO objects are now available for selection. In this example,
the input of channel 4 of the EL1004 terminal is selected for linking. In contrast, the checkbox “All types”
must be ticked to create the link for the output variables, in order to allocate a set of eight separate output
bits to a byte variable in this case. The following diagram shows the whole process:

Fig. 49: Selecting several PDOs simultaneously: activate “Continuous” and “All types”

Note that the “Continuous” checkbox was also activated. This is designed to allocate the bits contained in the
byte of the “nEL2008_value” variable sequentially to all eight selected output bits of the EL2008 Terminal. It
is thus possible to subsequently address all eight outputs of the terminal in the program with a byte
corresponding to bit 0 for channel 1 to bit 7 for channel 8 of the PLC. A special symbol ( ) on the yellow or
red object of the variable indicates that a link exists. The links can also be checked by selecting “Goto Link
Variable” from the context menu of a variable. The opposite linked object, in this case the PDO, is
automatically selected:

66 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 50: Application of a “Goto Link Variable”, using “MAIN.bEL1004_Ch4” as an example

The process of assigning variables to the PDO is completed via the menu option “Actions” → “Create

assignment”, or via .

This can be visualized in the configuration:

The process of creating links can also be performed in the opposite direction, i.e. starting with individual
PDOs to a variable. However, in this example, it would not be possible to select all output bits for the
EL2008, since the terminal only makes individual digital outputs available. If a terminal has a byte, word,
integer or similar PDO, it is also possible to allocate this to a set of bit-standardized variables. Here, too, a
“Goto Link Variable” can be executed in the other direction, so that the respective PLC instance can then be
selected.

Activation of the configuration

The allocation of PDO to PLC variables has now established the connection from the controller to the inputs
and outputs of the terminals. The configuration can now be activated. First, the configuration can be verified

via (or via “Actions” → “Check Configuration”). If no error is present, the configuration can be

activated via (or via “Actions” → “Activate Configuration…”) to transfer the System Manager settings
to the runtime system. Confirm the messages “Old configurations will be overwritten!” and “Restart TwinCAT
system in Run mode” with “OK”.

A few seconds later, the real-time status is displayed at the bottom right in the System Manager.
The PLC system can then be started as described below.

Starting the controller

Starting from a remote system, the PLC control has to be linked with the embedded PC over the Ethernet via
“Online” → “Choose Runtime System…”:

EL252x Version: 4.3 67


Commissioning

Fig. 51: Choose target system (remote)

In this example, “Runtime system 1 (port 801)” is selected and confirmed. Link the PLC with the real-time

system via the menu option “Online” → “Login”, the F11 key or by clicking on the symbol . The control
program can then be loaded for execution. This results in the message “No program on the controller!
Should the new program be loaded?”, which should be confirmed with “Yes”. The runtime environment is
ready for the program start:

68 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 52: PLC Control logged in, ready for program startup

The PLC can now be started via “Online” → “Run”, F5 key or .

6.1.2 TwinCAT 3

Startup

TwinCAT 3 makes the development environment areas available all together, with Microsoft Visual Studio:
after startup, the project folder explorer appears on the left in the general window area (see “TwinCAT
System Manager” of TwinCAT 2) for communication with the electromechanical components.

After successful installation of the TwinCAT system on the PC to be used for development, TwinCAT 3
(shell) displays the following user interface after startup:

EL252x Version: 4.3 69


Commissioning

Fig. 53: Initial TwinCAT 3 user interface

First create a new project via (or under “File”→“New”→ “Project…”). In the
following dialog, make the corresponding entries as required (as shown in the diagram):

Fig. 54: Create new TwinCAT 3 project

The new project is then available in the project folder explorer:

70 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 55: New TwinCAT 3 project in the project folder explorer

Generally, TwinCAT can be used in local or remote mode. Once the TwinCAT system including the user
interface (standard) is installed on the respective PLC (locally), TwinCAT can be used in local mode and the
process can be continued with the next step, “Insert Device [} 72]”.

If the intention is to address the TwinCAT runtime environment installed on a PLC remotely from another
system used as a development environment, the target system must be made known first. Via the symbol in
the menu bar:

expand the pull-down menu:

and open the following window:

Fig. 56: Selection dialog: Choose the target system

EL252x Version: 4.3 71


Commissioning

Use “Search (Ethernet)...” to enter the target system. Thus another dialog opens to either:
• enter the known computer name after “Enter Host Name / IP:” (as shown in red)
• perform a “Broadcast Search” (if the exact computer name is not known)
• enter the known computer – IP or AmsNetID

Fig. 57: specify the PLC for access by the TwinCAT System Manager: selection of the target system

Once the target system has been entered, it is available for selection as follows (the correct password may
have to be entered beforehand):

After confirmation with “OK” the target system can be accessed via the Visual Studio shell.

Adding devices

In the project folder explorer on the left of the Visual Studio shell user interface, select “Devices” within the

element “I/O”, then right-click to open a context menu and select “Scan” or start the action via in the

menu bar. The TwinCAT System Manager may first have to be set to “Config mode” via or via the
menu “TwinCAT” → “Restart TwinCAT (Config Mode)”.

Fig. 58: Select “Scan”

Confirm the warning message, which follows, and select the “EtherCAT” devices in the dialog:

72 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 59: Automatic detection of I/O devices: selection of the devices to be integrated

Confirm the message “Find new boxes”, in order to determine the terminals connected to the devices. “Free
Run” enables manipulation of input and output values in “Config Mode” and should also be acknowledged.

Based on the example configuration [} 57] described at the beginning of this section, the result is as follows:

Fig. 60: Mapping of the configuration in VS shell of the TwinCAT 3 environment

The whole process consists of two stages, which can also be performed separately (first determine the
devices, then determine the connected elements such as boxes, terminals, etc.). A scan (search function)
can also be initiated by selecting “Device ...” from the context menu, which then only reads the elements
below which are present in the configuration:

EL252x Version: 4.3 73


Commissioning

Fig. 61: Reading of individual terminals connected to a device

This functionality is useful if the actual configuration is modified at short notice.

Programming the PLC

TwinCAT PLC Control is the development environment for generating the controller in different program
environments: TwinCAT PLC Control supports all languages described in IEC 61131-3. There are two text-
based languages and three graphical languages.
• Text-based languages
◦ Instruction List (IL)
◦ Structured Text (ST)
• Graphical languages
◦ Function Block Diagram (FBD)
◦ Ladder Diagram (LD)
◦ The Continuous Function Chart Editor (CFC)
◦ Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

The following section refers solely to Structured Text (ST).

In order to create a programming environment, a PLC subproject is added to the example project via the
context menu of the “PLC” in the project folder explorer by selecting “Add New Item….”:

74 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 62: Adding the programming environment in “PLC”

In the dialog that opens, select “Standard PLC project” and enter “PLC_example” as project name, for
example, and select a corresponding directory:

Fig. 63: Specifying the name and directory for the PLC programming environment

The “Main” program, which already exists due to selecting “Standard PLC project”, can be opened by
double-clicking on “PLC_example_project” in “POUs”. The following user interface is shown for an initial
project:

EL252x Version: 4.3 75


Commissioning

Fig. 64: Initial “Main” program for the standard PLC project

Now example variables and an example program have been created for the next stage of the process:

76 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 65: Example program with variables after a compile process (without variable integration)

The control program is now created as a project folder, followed by the compile process:

Fig. 66: Start program compilation

The following variables, identified in the ST/PLC program with “AT%”, are then available under
“Assignments” in the project folder explorer:

Assigning variables

Via the menu of an instance – variables in the “PLC” context, use the “Modify Link…” option to open a
window to select a suitable process object (PDO) for linking:

EL252x Version: 4.3 77


Commissioning

Fig. 67: Creating the links between PLC variables and process objects

In the window that opens, the process object for the “bEL1004_Ch4” BOOL-type variable can be selected
from the PLC configuration tree:

Fig. 68: Selecting BOOL-type PDO

According to the default setting, only certain PDO objects are now available for selection. In this example,
the input of channel 4 of the EL1004 terminal is selected for linking. In contrast, the checkbox “All types”
must be ticked to create the link for the output variables, in order to allocate a set of eight separate output
bits to a byte variable in this case. The following diagram shows the whole process:

78 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 69: Selecting several PDOs simultaneously: activate “Continuous” and “All types”

Note that the “Continuous” checkbox was also activated. This is designed to allocate the bits contained in the
byte of the “nEL2008_value” variable sequentially to all eight selected output bits of the EL2008 Terminal. It
is thus possible to subsequently address all eight outputs of the terminal in the program with a byte
corresponding to bit 0 for channel 1 to bit 7 for channel 8 of the PLC. A special symbol ( ) on the yellow or
red object of the variable indicates that a link exists. The links can also be checked by selecting “Goto Link
Variable” from the context menu of a variable. The opposite linked object, in this case the PDO, is
automatically selected:

Fig. 70: Application of a “Goto Link Variable”, using “MAIN.bEL1004_Ch4” as an example

The process of creating links can also be performed in the opposite direction, i.e. starting with individual
PDOs to a variable. However, in this example, it would not be possible to select all output bits for the
EL2008, since the terminal only makes individual digital outputs available. If a terminal has a byte, word,

EL252x Version: 4.3 79


Commissioning

integer or similar PDO, it is also possible to allocate this to a set of bit-standardized variables. Here, too, a
“Goto Link Variable” can be executed in the other direction, so that the respective PLC instance can then be
selected.

Note on type of variable assignment


The following type of variable assignment can only be used from TwinCAT version V3.1.4024.4
onwards and is only available for terminals with a microcontroller.

In TwinCAT, a structure can be created from the mapped process data of a terminal. An instance of this
structure can then be created in the PLC, so it is possible to access the process data directly from the PLC
without having to declare own variables.

The procedure for the EL3001 1-channel analog input terminal -10...+10 V is shown as an example.

1. First, the required process data must be selected in the “Process data” tab in TwinCAT.
2. After that, the PLC data type must be generated in the “PLC” tab via the check box.
3. The data type in the “Data Type” field can then be copied using the “Copy” button.

Fig. 71: Creating a PLC data type

4. An instance of the data structure of the copied data type must then be created in the PLC.

Fig. 72: Instance_of_struct

5. Then the project folder must be created. This can be done either via the key combination “CTRL +
Shift + B” or via the “Build” tab in TwinCAT.
6. The structure in the “PLC” tab of the terminal must then be linked to the created instance.

80 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 73: Linking the structure

7. In the PLC, the process data can then be read or written via the structure in the program code.

Fig. 74: Reading a variable from the structure of the process data

Activation of the configuration

The allocation of PDO to PLC variables has now established the connection from the controller to the inputs

and outputs of the terminals. The configuration can now be activated with or via the menu under
“TwinCAT” in order to transfer the settings of the development environment to the runtime system. Confirm
the messages “Old configurations will be overwritten!” and “Restart TwinCAT system in Run mode” with
“OK”. The corresponding assignments can be seen in the project folder explorer:

A few seconds later, the corresponding status of the Run mode is displayed in the form of a rotating symbol

at the bottom right of the VS shell development environment. The PLC system can then be started as
described below.

EL252x Version: 4.3 81


Commissioning

Starting the controller

Select the menu option “PLC” → “Login” or click on to link the PLC with the real-time system and load
the control program for execution. This results in the message ”No program on the controller! Should the
new program be loaded?”, which should be acknowledged with “Yes”. The runtime environment is ready for

the program to be started by clicking on symbol , the “F5” key or via “PLC” in the menu, by selecting
“Start”. The started programming environment shows the runtime values of individual variables:

Fig. 75: TwinCAT 3 development environment (VS shell): logged-in, after program startup

The two operator control elements for stopping and logout result in the required action (also,
“Shift + F5” can be used for stop, or both actions can be selected via the PLC menu).

6.2 TwinCAT Development Environment


The Software for automation TwinCAT (The Windows Control and Automation Technology) will be
distinguished into:
• TwinCAT 2: System Manager (Configuration) & PLC Control (Programming)
• TwinCAT 3: Enhancement of TwinCAT 2 (Programming and Configuration takes place via a common
Development Environment)

Details:
• TwinCAT 2:
◦ Connects I/O devices to tasks in a variable-oriented manner
◦ Connects tasks to tasks in a variable-oriented manner
◦ Supports units at the bit level
◦ Supports synchronous or asynchronous relationships
◦ Exchange of consistent data areas and process images
◦ Datalink on NT - Programs by open Microsoft Standards (OLE, OCX, ActiveX, DCOM+, etc.)

82 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

◦ Integration of IEC 61131-3-Software-SPS, Software- NC and Software-CNC within Windows NT/


2000/XP/Vista, Windows 7, NT/XP Embedded, CE
◦ Interconnection to all common fieldbusses
◦ More…

Additional features:
• TwinCAT 3 (eXtended Automation):
◦ Visual-Studio®-Integration
◦ Choice of the programming language
◦ Supports object orientated extension of IEC 61131-3
◦ Usage of C/C++ as programming language for real time applications
◦ Connection to MATLAB®/Simulink®
◦ Open interface for expandability
◦ Flexible run-time environment
◦ Active support of Multi-Core- and 64-Bit-Operatingsystem
◦ Automatic code generation and project creation with the TwinCAT Automation Interface
◦ More…

Within the following sections commissioning of the TwinCAT Development Environment on a PC System for
the control and also the basically functions of unique control elements will be explained.

Please see further information to TwinCAT 2 and TwinCAT 3 at http://infosys.beckhoff.com.

6.2.1 Installation of the TwinCAT real-time driver


In order to assign real-time capability to a standard Ethernet port of an IPC controller, the Beckhoff real-time
driver has to be installed on this port under Windows.

This can be done in several ways.

A: Via the TwinCAT Adapter dialog

In the System Manager call up the TwinCAT overview of the local network interfaces via Options → Show
Real Time Ethernet Compatible Devices.

Fig. 76: System Manager “Options” (TwinCAT 2)

This have to be called up by the menu “TwinCAT” within the TwinCAT 3 environment:

EL252x Version: 4.3 83


Commissioning

Fig. 77: Call up under VS Shell (TwinCAT 3)

B: Via TcRteInstall.exe in the TwinCAT directory

Fig. 78: TcRteInstall in the TwinCAT directory

In both cases, the following dialog appears:

84 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 79: Overview of network interfaces

Interfaces listed under “Compatible devices” can be assigned a driver via the “Install” button. A driver should
only be installed on compatible devices.

A Windows warning regarding the unsigned driver can be ignored.

Alternatively an EtherCAT-device can be inserted first of all as described in chapter Offline configuration
creation, section “Creating the EtherCAT device” [} 94] in order to view the compatible ethernet ports via its
EtherCAT properties (tab “Adapter”, button “Compatible Devices…”):

Fig. 80: EtherCAT device properties (TwinCAT 2): click on “Compatible Devices…” of tab “Adapter”

TwinCAT 3: the properties of the EtherCAT device can be opened by double click on “Device .. (EtherCAT)”
within the Solution Explorer under “I/O”:

After the installation the driver appears activated in the Windows overview for the network interface
(Windows Start → System Properties → Network)

EL252x Version: 4.3 85


Commissioning

Fig. 81: Windows properties of the network interface

A correct setting of the driver could be:

Fig. 82: Exemplary correct driver setting for the Ethernet port

Other possible settings have to be avoided:

86 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 83: Incorrect driver settings for the Ethernet port

EL252x Version: 4.3 87


Commissioning

IP address of the port used

IP address/DHCP
In most cases an Ethernet port that is configured as an EtherCAT device will not transport general
IP packets. For this reason and in cases where an EL6601 or similar devices are used it is useful to
specify a fixed IP address for this port via the “Internet Protocol TCP/IP” driver setting and to disable
DHCP. In this way the delay associated with the DHCP client for the Ethernet port assigning itself a
default IP address in the absence of a DHCP server is avoided. A suitable address space is
192.168.x.x, for example.

Fig. 84: TCP/IP setting for the Ethernet port

88 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.2.2 Notes regarding ESI device description

Installation of the latest ESI device description

The TwinCAT EtherCAT master/System Manager needs the device description files for the devices to be
used in order to generate the configuration in online or offline mode. The device descriptions are contained
in the so-called ESI files (EtherCAT Slave Information) in XML format. These files can be requested from the
respective manufacturer and are made available for download. An *.xml file may contain several device
descriptions.

The ESI files for Beckhoff EtherCAT devices are available on the Beckhoff website.

The ESI files should be stored in the TwinCAT installation directory.

Default settings:
• TwinCAT 2: C:\TwinCAT\IO\EtherCAT
• TwinCAT 3: C:\TwinCAT\3.1\Config\Io\EtherCAT

The files are read (once) when a new System Manager window is opened, if they have changed since the
last time the System Manager window was opened.

A TwinCAT installation includes the set of Beckhoff ESI files that was current at the time when the TwinCAT
build was created.

For TwinCAT 2.11/TwinCAT 3 and higher, the ESI directory can be updated from the System Manager, if the
programming PC is connected to the Internet; by
• TwinCAT 2: Option → “Update EtherCAT Device Descriptions”
• TwinCAT 3: TwinCAT → EtherCAT Devices → “Update Device Descriptions (via ETG Website)…”

The TwinCAT ESI Updater [} 93] is available for this purpose.

ESI
The *.xml files are associated with *.xsd files, which describe the structure of the ESI XML files. To
update the ESI device descriptions, both file types should therefore be updated.

Device differentiation

EtherCAT devices/slaves are distinguished by four properties, which determine the full device identifier. For
example, the device identifier EL2521-0025-1018 consists of:
• family key “EL”
• name “2521”
• type “0025”
• and revision “1018”

Fig. 85: Identifier structure

The order identifier consisting of name + type (here: EL2521-0010) describes the device function. The
revision indicates the technical progress and is managed by Beckhoff. In principle, a device with a higher
revision can replace a device with a lower revision, unless specified otherwise, e.g. in the documentation.
Each revision has its own ESI description. See further notes.

EL252x Version: 4.3 89


Commissioning

Online description

If the EtherCAT configuration is created online through scanning of real devices (see section Online setup)
and no ESI descriptions are available for a slave (specified by name and revision) that was found, the
System Manager asks whether the description stored in the device should be used. In any case, the System
Manager needs this information for setting up the cyclic and acyclic communication with the slave correctly.

Fig. 86: OnlineDescription information window (TwinCAT 2)

In TwinCAT 3 a similar window appears, which also offers the Web update:

Fig. 87: Information window OnlineDescription (TwinCAT 3)

If possible, the Yes is to be rejected and the required ESI is to be requested from the device manufacturer.
After installation of the XML/XSD file the configuration process should be repeated.

NOTE
Changing the “usual” configuration through a scan
ü If a scan discovers a device that is not yet known to TwinCAT, distinction has to be made between two
cases. Taking the example here of the EL2521-0000 in the revision 1019
a) no ESI is present for the EL2521-0000 device at all, either for the revision 1019 or for an older revision.
The ESI must then be requested from the manufacturer (in this case Beckhoff).
b) an ESI is present for the EL2521-0000 device, but only in an older revision, e.g. 1018 or 1017.
In this case an in-house check should first be performed to determine whether the spare parts stock
allows the integration of the increased revision into the configuration at all. A new/higher revision usually
also brings along new features. If these are not to be used, work can continue without reservations with
the previous revision 1018 in the configuration. This is also stated by the Beckhoff compatibility rule.

Refer in particular to the chapter “General notes on the use of Beckhoff EtherCAT IO components” and for
manual configuration to the chapter “Offline configuration creation [} 94]”.

If the OnlineDescription is used regardless, the System Manager reads a copy of the device description from
the EEPROM in the EtherCAT slave. In complex slaves the size of the EEPROM may not be sufficient for the
complete ESI, in which case the ESI would be incomplete in the configurator. Therefore it’s recommended
using an offline ESI file with priority in such a case.

The System Manager creates for online recorded device descriptions a new file
“OnlineDescription0000...xml” in its ESI directory, which contains all ESI descriptions that were read online.

90 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 88: File OnlineDescription.xml created by the System Manager

Is a slave desired to be added manually to the configuration at a later stage, online created slaves are
indicated by a prepended symbol “>” in the selection list (see Figure Indication of an online recorded ESI of
EL2521 as an example).

Fig. 89: Indication of an online recorded ESI of EL2521 as an example

If such ESI files are used and the manufacturer's files become available later, the file OnlineDescription.xml
should be deleted as follows:
• close all System Manager windows
• restart TwinCAT in Config mode
• delete “OnlineDescription0000...xml”
• restart TwinCAT System Manager

This file should not be visible after this procedure, if necessary press <F5> to update

OnlineDescription for TwinCAT 3.x


In addition to the file described above “OnlineDescription0000...xml”, a so called EtherCAT cache
with new discovered devices is created by TwinCAT 3.x, e.g. under Windows 7:

(Please note the language settings of the OS!)


You have to delete this file, too.

Faulty ESI file

If an ESI file is faulty and the System Manager is unable to read it, the System Manager brings up an
information window.

Fig. 90: Information window for faulty ESI file (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

EL252x Version: 4.3 91


Commissioning

Reasons may include:


• Structure of the *.xml does not correspond to the associated *.xsd file → check your schematics
• Contents cannot be translated into a device description → contact the file manufacturer

92 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.2.3 TwinCAT ESI Updater


For TwinCAT 2.11 and higher, the System Manager can search for current Beckhoff ESI files automatically, if
an online connection is available:

Fig. 91: Using the ESI Updater (>= TwinCAT 2.11)

The call up takes place under:


“Options” → “Update EtherCAT Device Descriptions”

Selection under TwinCAT 3:

Fig. 92: Using the ESI Updater (TwinCAT 3)

The ESI Updater (TwinCAT 3) is a convenient option for automatic downloading of ESI data provided by
EtherCAT manufacturers via the Internet into the TwinCAT directory (ESI = EtherCAT slave information).
TwinCAT accesses the central ESI ULR directory list stored at ETG; the entries can then be viewed in the
Updater dialog, although they cannot be changed there.

The call up takes place under:


“TwinCAT” → “EtherCAT Devices” → “Update Device Description (via ETG Website)…”.

6.2.4 Distinction between Online and Offline


The distinction between online and offline refers to the presence of the actual I/O environment (drives,
terminals, EJ-modules). If the configuration is to be prepared in advance of the system configuration as a
programming system, e.g. on a laptop, this is only possible in “Offline configuration” mode. In this case all
components have to be entered manually in the configuration, e.g. based on the electrical design.

If the designed control system is already connected to the EtherCAT system and all components are
energised and the infrastructure is ready for operation, the TwinCAT configuration can simply be generated
through “scanning” from the runtime system. This is referred to as online configuration.

In any case, during each startup the EtherCAT master checks whether the slaves it finds match the
configuration. This test can be parameterised in the extended slave settings. Refer to note “Installation of
the latest ESI-XML device description” [} 89].

For preparation of a configuration:


• the real EtherCAT hardware (devices, couplers, drives) must be present and installed
• the devices/modules must be connected via EtherCAT cables or in the terminal/ module strand in the
same way as they are intended to be used later

EL252x Version: 4.3 93


Commissioning

• the devices/modules be connected to the power supply and ready for communication
• TwinCAT must be in CONFIG mode on the target system.

The online scan process consists of:


• detecting the EtherCAT device [} 99] (Ethernet port at the IPC)
• detecting the connected EtherCAT devices [} 100]. This step can be carried out independent of the
preceding step
• troubleshooting [} 103]

The scan with existing configuration [} 104] can also be carried out for comparison.

6.2.5 OFFLINE configuration creation

Creating the EtherCAT device

Create an EtherCAT device in an empty System Manager window.

Fig. 93: Append EtherCAT device (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

Select type “EtherCAT” for an EtherCAT I/O application with EtherCAT slaves. For the present publisher/
subscriber service in combination with an EL6601/EL6614 terminal select “EtherCAT Automation Protocol
via EL6601”.

Fig. 94: Selecting the EtherCAT connection (TwinCAT 2.11, TwinCAT 3)

Then assign a real Ethernet port to this virtual device in the runtime system.

Fig. 95: Selecting the Ethernet port

94 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

This query may appear automatically when the EtherCAT device is created, or the assignment can be set/
modified later in the properties dialog; see Fig. “EtherCAT device properties (TwinCAT 2)”.

Fig. 96: EtherCAT device properties (TwinCAT 2)

TwinCAT 3: the properties of the EtherCAT device can be opened by double click on “Device .. (EtherCAT)”
within the Solution Explorer under “I/O”:

Selecting the Ethernet port


Ethernet ports can only be selected for EtherCAT devices for which the TwinCAT real-time driver is
installed. This has to be done separately for each port. Please refer to the respective installation
page [} 83].

Defining EtherCAT slaves

Further devices can be appended by right-clicking on a device in the configuration tree.

Fig. 97: Appending EtherCAT devices (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

The dialog for selecting a new device opens. Only devices for which ESI files are available are displayed.

Only devices are offered for selection that can be appended to the previously selected device. Therefore, the
physical layer available for this port is also displayed (Fig. “Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device”, A). In
the case of cable-based Fast-Ethernet physical layer with PHY transfer, then also only cable-based devices
are available, as shown in Fig. “Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device”. If the preceding device has
several free ports (e.g. EK1122 or EK1100), the required port can be selected on the right-hand side (A).

Overview of physical layer


• “Ethernet”: cable-based 100BASE-TX: couplers, box modules, devices with RJ45/M8/M12 connector

EL252x Version: 4.3 95


Commissioning

• “E-Bus”: LVDS “terminal bus”, EtherCAT plug-in modules (EJ), EtherCAT terminals (EL/ES), various
modular modules

The search field facilitates finding specific devices (since TwinCAT 2.11 or TwinCAT 3).

Fig. 98: Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device

By default, only the name/device type is used as selection criterion. For selecting a specific revision of the
device, the revision can be displayed as “Extended Information”.

Fig. 99: Display of device revision

In many cases several device revisions were created for historic or functional reasons, e.g. through
technological advancement. For simplification purposes (see Fig. “Selection dialog for new EtherCAT
device”) only the last (i.e. highest) revision and therefore the latest state of production is displayed in the
selection dialog for Beckhoff devices. To show all device revisions available in the system as ESI
descriptions tick the “Show Hidden Devices” check box, see Fig. “Display of previous revisions”.

96 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 100: Display of previous revisions

Device selection based on revision, compatibility


The ESI description also defines the process image, the communication type between master and
slave/device and the device functions, if applicable. The physical device (firmware, if available) has
to support the communication queries/settings of the master. This is backward compatible, i.e.
newer devices (higher revision) should be supported if the EtherCAT master addresses them as an
older revision. The following compatibility rule of thumb is to be assumed for Beckhoff EtherCAT
Terminals/ Boxes/ EJ-modules:
device revision in the system >= device revision in the configuration
This also enables subsequent replacement of devices without changing the configuration (different
specifications are possible for drives).

Example

If an EL2521-0025-1018 is specified in the configuration, an EL2521-0025-1018 or higher (-1019, -1020) can


be used in practice.

Fig. 101: Name/revision of the terminal

If current ESI descriptions are available in the TwinCAT system, the last revision offered in the selection
dialog matches the Beckhoff state of production. It is recommended to use the last device revision when
creating a new configuration, if current Beckhoff devices are used in the real application. Older revisions
should only be used if older devices from stock are to be used in the application.

In this case the process image of the device is shown in the configuration tree and can be parameterized as
follows: linking with the task, CoE/DC settings, plug-in definition, startup settings, ...

EL252x Version: 4.3 97


Commissioning

Fig. 102: EtherCAT terminal in the TwinCAT tree (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

98 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.2.6 ONLINE configuration creation

Detecting/scanning of the EtherCAT device

The online device search can be used if the TwinCAT system is in CONFIG mode. This can be indicated by
a symbol right below in the information bar:

• on TwinCAT 2 by a blue display “Config Mode” within the System Manager window: .

• on TwinCAT 3 within the user interface of the development environment by a symbol .

TwinCAT can be set into this mode:

• TwinCAT 2: by selection of in the Menubar or by “Actions” → “Set/Reset TwinCAT to Config


Mode…”

• TwinCAT 3: by selection of in the Menubar or by “TwinCAT” → “Restart TwinCAT (Config Mode)”

Online scanning in Config mode


The online search is not available in RUN mode (production operation). Note the differentiation
between TwinCAT programming system and TwinCAT target system.

The TwinCAT 2 icon ( ) or TwinCAT 3 icon ( ) within the Windows-Taskbar always shows the
TwinCAT mode of the local IPC. Compared to that, the System Manager window of TwinCAT 2 or the user
interface of TwinCAT 3 indicates the state of the target system.

Fig. 103: Differentiation local/target system (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

Right-clicking on “I/O Devices” in the configuration tree opens the search dialog.

Fig. 104: Scan Devices (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

This scan mode attempts to find not only EtherCAT devices (or Ethernet ports that are usable as such), but
also NOVRAM, fieldbus cards, SMB etc. However, not all devices can be found automatically.

Fig. 105: Note for automatic device scan (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

EL252x Version: 4.3 99


Commissioning

Ethernet ports with installed TwinCAT real-time driver are shown as “RT Ethernet” devices. An EtherCAT
frame is sent to these ports for testing purposes. If the scan agent detects from the response that an
EtherCAT slave is connected, the port is immediately shown as an “EtherCAT Device” .

Fig. 106: Detected Ethernet devices

Via respective checkboxes devices can be selected (as illustrated in Fig. “Detected Ethernet devices” e.g.
Device 3 and Device 4 were chosen). After confirmation with “OK” a device scan is suggested for all selected
devices, see Fig.: “Scan query after automatic creation of an EtherCAT device”.

Selecting the Ethernet port


Ethernet ports can only be selected for EtherCAT devices for which the TwinCAT real-time driver is
installed. This has to be done separately for each port. Please refer to the respective installation
page [} 83].

Detecting/Scanning the EtherCAT devices

Online scan functionality


During a scan the master queries the identity information of the EtherCAT slaves from the slave
EEPROM. The name and revision are used for determining the type. The respective devices are
located in the stored ESI data and integrated in the configuration tree in the default state defined
there.

Fig. 107: Example default state

NOTE
Slave scanning in practice in series machine production
The scanning function should be used with care. It is a practical and fast tool for creating an initial
configuration as a basis for commissioning. In series machine production or reproduction of the plant,
however, the function should no longer be used for the creation of the configuration, but if necessary for
comparison [} 104] with the defined initial configuration.Background: since Beckhoff occasionally increases
the revision version of the delivered products for product maintenance reasons, a configuration can be
created by such a scan which (with an identical machine construction) is identical according to the device
list; however, the respective device revision may differ from the initial configuration.

Example:

Company A builds the prototype of a machine B, which is to be produced in series later on. To do this the
prototype is built, a scan of the IO devices is performed in TwinCAT and the initial configuration “B.tsm” is
created. The EL2521-0025 EtherCAT terminal with the revision 1018 is located somewhere. It is thus built
into the TwinCAT configuration in this way:

100 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 108: Installing EthetCAT terminal with revision -1018

Likewise, during the prototype test phase, the functions and properties of this terminal are tested by the
programmers/commissioning engineers and used if necessary, i.e. addressed from the PLC “B.pro” or the
NC. (the same applies correspondingly to the TwinCAT 3 solution files).

The prototype development is now completed and series production of machine B starts, for which Beckhoff
continues to supply the EL2521-0025-0018. If the commissioning engineers of the series machine production
department always carry out a scan, a B configuration with the identical contents results again for each
machine. Likewise, A might create spare parts stores worldwide for the coming series-produced machines
with EL2521-0025-1018 terminals.

After some time Beckhoff extends the EL2521-0025 by a new feature C. Therefore the FW is changed,
outwardly recognizable by a higher FW version and a new revision -1019. Nevertheless the new device
naturally supports functions and interfaces of the predecessor version(s); an adaptation of “B.tsm” or even
“B.pro” is therefore unnecessary. The series-produced machines can continue to be built with “B.tsm” and
“B.pro”; it makes sense to perform a comparative scan [} 104] against the initial configuration “B.tsm” in order
to check the built machine.

However, if the series machine production department now doesn’t use “B.tsm”, but instead carries out a
scan to create the productive configuration, the revision -1019 is automatically detected and built into the
configuration:

Fig. 109: Detection of EtherCAT terminal with revision -1019

This is usually not noticed by the commissioning engineers. TwinCAT cannot signal anything either, since
virtually a new configuration is created. According to the compatibility rule, however, this means that no
EL2521-0025-1018 should be built into this machine as a spare part (even if this nevertheless works in the
vast majority of cases).

In addition, it could be the case that, due to the development accompanying production in company A, the
new feature C of the EL2521-0025-1019 (for example, an improved analog filter or an additional process
data for the diagnosis) is discovered and used without in-house consultation. The previous stock of spare
part devices are then no longer to be used for the new configuration “B2.tsm” created in this way. Þ if series
machine production is established, the scan should only be performed for informative purposes for
comparison with a defined initial configuration. Changes are to be made with care!

If an EtherCAT device was created in the configuration (manually or through a scan), the I/O field can be
scanned for devices/slaves.

Fig. 110: Scan query after automatic creation of an EtherCAT device (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

EL252x Version: 4.3 101


Commissioning

Fig. 111: Manual triggering of a device scan on a specified EtherCAT device (left: TwinCAT 2; right:
TwinCAT 3)

In the System Manager (TwinCAT 2) or the User Interface (TwinCAT 3) the scan process can be monitored
via the progress bar at the bottom in the status bar.

Fig. 112: Scan progressexemplary by TwinCAT 2

The configuration is established and can then be switched to online state (OPERATIONAL).

Fig. 113: Config/FreeRun query (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

In Config/FreeRun mode the System Manager display alternates between blue and red, and the EtherCAT
device continues to operate with the idling cycle time of 4 ms (default setting), even without active task (NC,
PLC).

Fig. 114: Displaying of “Free Run” and “Config Mode” toggling right below in the status bar

Fig. 115: TwinCAT can also be switched to this state by using a button (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

The EtherCAT system should then be in a functional cyclic state, as shown in Fig. Online display example.

102 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 116: Online display example

Please note:
• all slaves should be in OP state
• the EtherCAT master should be in “Actual State” OP
• “frames/sec” should match the cycle time taking into account the sent number of frames
• no excessive “LostFrames” or CRC errors should occur

The configuration is now complete. It can be modified as described under manual procedure [} 94].

Troubleshooting

Various effects may occur during scanning.


• An unknown device is detected, i.e. an EtherCAT slave for which no ESI XML description is available.
In this case the System Manager offers to read any ESI that may be stored in the device. This case is
described in the chapter “Notes regarding ESI device description”.
• Device are not detected properly
Possible reasons include:
◦ faulty data links, resulting in data loss during the scan
◦ slave has invalid device description
The connections and devices should be checked in a targeted manner, e.g. via the emergency
scan.
Then re-run the scan.

Fig. 117: Faulty identification

In the System Manager such devices may be set up as EK0000 or unknown devices. Operation is not
possible or meaningful.

EL252x Version: 4.3 103


Commissioning

Scan over existing Configuration

NOTE
Change of the configuration after comparison
With this scan (TwinCAT 2.11 or 3.1) only the device properties vendor (manufacturer), device name and
revision are compared at present! A “ChangeTo” or “Copy” should only be carried out with care, taking into
consideration the Beckhoff IO compatibility rule (see above). The device configuration is then replaced by
the revision found; this can affect the supported process data and functions.

If a scan is initiated for an existing configuration, the actual I/O environment may match the configuration
exactly or it may differ. This enables the configuration to be compared.

Fig. 118: Identical configuration (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

If differences are detected, they are shown in the correction dialog, so that the user can modify the
configuration as required.

Fig. 119: Correction dialog

It is advisable to tick the “Extended Information” check box to reveal differences in the revision.

104 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Color Explanation
green This EtherCAT slave matches the entry on the other side. Both type and revision match.
blue This EtherCAT slave is present on the other side, but in a different revision. This other revision can
have other default values for the process data as well as other/additional functions.
If the found revision is higher than the configured revision, the slave may be used provided
compatibility issues are taken into account.
If the found revision is lower than the configured revision, it is likely that the slave cannot be used.
The found device may not support all functions that the master expects based on the higher
revision number.
light This EtherCAT slave is ignored (“Ignore” button)
blue
red • This EtherCAT slave is not present on the other side.
• It is present, but in a different revision, which also differs in its properties from the one specified.
The compatibility principle then also applies here: if the found revision is higher than the
configured revision, use is possible provided compatibility issues are taken into account, since
the successor devices should support the functions of the predecessor devices.
If the found revision is lower than the configured revision, it is likely that the slave cannot be
used. The found device may not support all functions that the master expects based on the
higher revision number.

Device selection based on revision, compatibility


The ESI description also defines the process image, the communication type between master and
slave/device and the device functions, if applicable. The physical device (firmware, if available) has
to support the communication queries/settings of the master. This is backward compatible, i.e.
newer devices (higher revision) should be supported if the EtherCAT master addresses them as an
older revision. The following compatibility rule of thumb is to be assumed for Beckhoff EtherCAT
Terminals/ Boxes/ EJ-modules:
device revision in the system >= device revision in the configuration
This also enables subsequent replacement of devices without changing the configuration (different
specifications are possible for drives).

Example

If an EL2521-0025-1018 is specified in the configuration, an EL2521-0025-1018 or higher (-1019, -1020) can


be used in practice.

Fig. 120: Name/revision of the terminal

If current ESI descriptions are available in the TwinCAT system, the last revision offered in the selection
dialog matches the Beckhoff state of production. It is recommended to use the last device revision when
creating a new configuration, if current Beckhoff devices are used in the real application. Older revisions
should only be used if older devices from stock are to be used in the application.

In this case the process image of the device is shown in the configuration tree and can be parameterized as
follows: linking with the task, CoE/DC settings, plug-in definition, startup settings, ...

EL252x Version: 4.3 105


Commissioning

Fig. 121: Correction dialog with modifications

Once all modifications have been saved or accepted, click “OK” to transfer them to the real *.tsm
configuration.

Change to Compatible Type

TwinCAT offers a function Change to Compatible Type… for the exchange of a device whilst retaining the
links in the task.

Fig. 122: Dialog “Change to Compatible Type…” (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)

The following elements in the ESI of an EtherCAT device are compared by TwinCAT and assumed to be the
same in order to decide whether a device is indicated as "compatible":

- Physics (e.g. RJ45, Ebus...)

- FMMU (additional ones are allowed)

- SyncManager (SM, additional ones are allowed)

- EoE (attributes MAC, IP)

- CoE (attributes SdoInfo, PdoAssign, PdoConfig, PdoUpload, CompleteAccess)

- FoE

- PDO (process data: Sequence, SyncUnit SU, SyncManager SM, EntryCount, Ent-ry.Datatype)

This function is preferably to be used on AX5000 devices.

Change to Alternative Type

The TwinCAT System Manager offers a function for the exchange of a device: Change to Alternative Type

106 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 123: TwinCAT 2 Dialog Change to Alternative Type

If called, the System Manager searches in the procured device ESI (in this example: EL1202-0000) for
details of compatible devices contained there. The configuration is changed and the ESI-EEPROM is
overwritten at the same time – therefore this process is possible only in the online state (ConfigMode).

6.2.7 EtherCAT subscriber configuration


In the left-hand window of the TwinCAT 2 System Manager or the Solution Explorer of the TwinCAT 3
Development Environment respectively, click on the element of the terminal within the tree you wish to
configure (in the example: EL3751 Terminal 3).

Fig. 124: Branch element as terminal EL3751

In the right-hand window of the TwinCAT System Manager (TwinCAT 2) or the Development Environment
(TwinCAT 3), various tabs are now available for configuring the terminal. And yet the dimension of
complexity of a subscriber determines which tabs are provided. Thus as illustrated in the example above the
terminal EL3751 provides many setup options and also a respective number of tabs are available. On the
contrary by the terminal EL1004 for example the tabs “General”, “EtherCAT”, “Process Data” and “Online“
are available only. Several terminals, as for instance the EL6695 provide special functions by a tab with its
own terminal name, so “EL6695” in this case. A specific tab “Settings” by terminals with a wide range of
setup options will be provided also (e.g. EL3751).

“General” tab

Fig. 125: “General” tab

EL252x Version: 4.3 107


Commissioning

Name Name of the EtherCAT device


Id Number of the EtherCAT device
Type EtherCAT device type
Comment Here you can add a comment (e.g. regarding the system).
Disabled Here you can deactivate the EtherCAT device.
Create symbols Access to this EtherCAT slave via ADS is only available if this control box is
activated.

“EtherCAT” tab

Fig. 126: “EtherCAT” tab

Type EtherCAT device type


Product/Revision Product and revision number of the EtherCAT device
Auto Inc Addr. Auto increment address of the EtherCAT device. The auto increment address can
be used for addressing each EtherCAT device in the communication ring through
its physical position. Auto increment addressing is used during the start-up phase
when the EtherCAT master allocates addresses to the EtherCAT devices. With
auto increment addressing the first EtherCAT slave in the ring has the address
0000hex. For each further slave the address is decremented by 1 (FFFFhex, FFFEhex
etc.).
EtherCAT Addr. Fixed address of an EtherCAT slave. This address is allocated by the EtherCAT
master during the start-up phase. Tick the control box to the left of the input field in
order to modify the default value.
Previous Port Name and port of the EtherCAT device to which this device is connected. If it is
possible to connect this device with another one without changing the order of the
EtherCAT devices in the communication ring, then this combination field is
activated and the EtherCAT device to which this device is to be connected can be
selected.
Advanced Settings This button opens the dialogs for advanced settings.

The link at the bottom of the tab points to the product page for this EtherCAT device on the web.

“Process Data” tab

Indicates the configuration of the process data. The input and output data of the EtherCAT slave are
represented as CANopen process data objects (Process Data Objects, PDOs). The user can select a PDO
via PDO assignment and modify the content of the individual PDO via this dialog, if the EtherCAT slave
supports this function.

108 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 127: “Process Data” tab

The process data (PDOs) transferred by an EtherCAT slave during each cycle are user data which the
application expects to be updated cyclically or which are sent to the slave. To this end the EtherCAT master
(Beckhoff TwinCAT) parameterizes each EtherCAT slave during the start-up phase to define which process
data (size in bits/bytes, source location, transmission type) it wants to transfer to or from this slave. Incorrect
configuration can prevent successful start-up of the slave.

For Beckhoff EtherCAT EL, ES, EM, EJ and EP slaves the following applies in general:
• The input/output process data supported by the device are defined by the manufacturer in the ESI/XML
description. The TwinCAT EtherCAT Master uses the ESI description to configure the slave correctly.
• The process data can be modified in the System Manager. See the device documentation.
Examples of modifications include: mask out a channel, displaying additional cyclic information, 16-bit
display instead of 8-bit data size, etc.
• In so-called “intelligent” EtherCAT devices the process data information is also stored in the CoE
directory. Any changes in the CoE directory that lead to different PDO settings prevent successful
startup of the slave. It is not advisable to deviate from the designated process data, because the
device firmware (if available) is adapted to these PDO combinations.

If the device documentation allows modification of process data, proceed as follows (see Figure Configuring
the process data).
• A: select the device to configure
• B: in the “Process Data” tab select Input or Output under SyncManager (C)
• D: the PDOs can be selected or deselected
• H: the new process data are visible as linkable variables in the System Manager
The new process data are active once the configuration has been activated and TwinCAT has been
restarted (or the EtherCAT master has been restarted)
• E: if a slave supports this, Input and Output PDO can be modified simultaneously by selecting a so-
called PDO record (“predefined PDO settings”).

EL252x Version: 4.3 109


Commissioning

Fig. 128: Configuring the process data

Manual modification of the process data


According to the ESI description, a PDO can be identified as “fixed” with the flag “F” in the PDO
overview (Fig. Configuring the process data, J). The configuration of such PDOs cannot be
changed, even if TwinCAT offers the associated dialog (“Edit”). In particular, CoE content cannot be
displayed as cyclic process data. This generally also applies in cases where a device supports
download of the PDO configuration, “G”. In case of incorrect configuration the EtherCAT slave
usually refuses to start and change to OP state. The System Manager displays an “invalid SM cfg”
logger message: This error message (“invalid SM IN cfg” or “invalid SM OUT cfg”) also indicates the
reason for the failed start.

A detailed description [} 115] can be found at the end of this section.

“Startup” tab

The Startup tab is displayed if the EtherCAT slave has a mailbox and supports the CANopen over EtherCAT
(CoE) or Servo drive over EtherCAT protocol. This tab indicates which download requests are sent to the
mailbox during startup. It is also possible to add new mailbox requests to the list display. The download
requests are sent to the slave in the same order as they are shown in the list.

110 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 129: “Startup” tab

Column Description
Transition Transition to which the request is sent. This can either be
• the transition from pre-operational to safe-operational (PS), or
• the transition from safe-operational to operational (SO).
If the transition is enclosed in “<>” (e.g. <PS>), the mailbox request is fixed and cannot be
modified or deleted by the user.
Protocol Type of mailbox protocol
Index Index of the object
Data Date on which this object is to be downloaded.
Comment Description of the request to be sent to the mailbox

Move Up This button moves the selected request up by one position in the list.
Move Down This button moves the selected request down by one position in the list.
New This button adds a new mailbox download request to be sent during startup.
Delete This button deletes the selected entry.
Edit This button edits an existing request.

“CoE - Online” tab

The additional CoE - Online tab is displayed if the EtherCAT slave supports the CANopen over EtherCAT
(CoE) protocol. This dialog lists the content of the object list of the slave (SDO upload) and enables the user
to modify the content of an object from this list. Details for the objects of the individual EtherCAT devices can
be found in the device-specific object descriptions.

EL252x Version: 4.3 111


Commissioning

Fig. 130: “CoE - Online” tab

Object list display


Column Description
Index Index and sub-index of the object
Name Name of the object
Flags RW The object can be read, and data can be written to the object (read/write)
RO The object can be read, but no data can be written to the object (read only)
P An additional P identifies the object as a process data object.
Value Value of the object

Update List The Update list button updates all objects in the displayed list
Auto Update If this check box is selected, the content of the objects is updated automatically.
Advanced The Advanced button opens the Advanced Settings dialog. Here you can specify which
objects are displayed in the list.

112 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 131: Dialog “Advanced settings”

Online - via SDO Information If this option button is selected, the list of the objects included in the object
list of the slave is uploaded from the slave via SDO information. The list
below can be used to specify which object types are to be uploaded.
Offline - via EDS File If this option button is selected, the list of the objects included in the object
list is read from an EDS file provided by the user.

“Online” tab

Fig. 132: “Online” tab

EL252x Version: 4.3 113


Commissioning

State Machine
Init This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the Init state.
Pre-Op This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the pre-operational state.
Op This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the operational state.
Bootstrap This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the Bootstrap state.
Safe-Op This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the safe-operational state.
Clear Error This button attempts to delete the fault display. If an EtherCAT slave fails during
change of state it sets an error flag.
Example: An EtherCAT slave is in PREOP state (pre-operational). The master now
requests the SAFEOP state (safe-operational). If the slave fails during change of
state it sets the error flag. The current state is now displayed as ERR PREOP.
When the Clear Error button is pressed the error flag is cleared, and the current
state is displayed as PREOP again.
Current State Indicates the current state of the EtherCAT device.
Requested State Indicates the state requested for the EtherCAT device.

DLL Status

Indicates the DLL status (data link layer status) of the individual ports of the EtherCAT slave. The DLL status
can have four different states:
Status Description
No Carrier / Open No carrier signal is available at the port, but the port is open.
No Carrier / Closed No carrier signal is available at the port, and the port is closed.
Carrier / Open A carrier signal is available at the port, and the port is open.
Carrier / Closed A carrier signal is available at the port, but the port is closed.

File Access over EtherCAT


Download With this button a file can be written to the EtherCAT device.
Upload With this button a file can be read from the EtherCAT device.

“DC” tab (Distributed Clocks)

Fig. 133: “DC” tab (Distributed Clocks)

Operation Mode Options (optional):


• FreeRun
• SM-Synchron
• DC-Synchron (Input based)
• DC-Synchron
Advanced Settings… Advanced settings for readjustment of the real time determinant TwinCAT-clock

Detailed information to Distributed Clocks is specified on http://infosys.beckhoff.com:

Fieldbus Components → EtherCAT Terminals → EtherCAT System documentation → EtherCAT basics →


Distributed Clocks

114 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.2.7.1 Detailed description of Process Data tab

Sync Manager

Lists the configuration of the Sync Manager (SM).


If the EtherCAT device has a mailbox, SM0 is used for the mailbox output (MbxOut) and SM1 for the mailbox
input (MbxIn).
SM2 is used for the output process data (outputs) and SM3 (inputs) for the input process data.

If an input is selected, the corresponding PDO assignment is displayed in the PDO Assignment list below.

PDO Assignment

PDO assignment of the selected Sync Manager. All PDOs defined for this Sync Manager type are listed
here:
• If the output Sync Manager (outputs) is selected in the Sync Manager list, all RxPDOs are displayed.
• If the input Sync Manager (inputs) is selected in the Sync Manager list, all TxPDOs are displayed.

The selected entries are the PDOs involved in the process data transfer. In the tree diagram of the System
Manager these PDOs are displayed as variables of the EtherCAT device. The name of the variable is
identical to the Name parameter of the PDO, as displayed in the PDO list. If an entry in the PDO assignment
list is deactivated (not selected and greyed out), this indicates that the input is excluded from the PDO
assignment. In order to be able to select a greyed out PDO, the currently selected PDO has to be deselected
first.

Activation of PDO assignment


ü If you have changed the PDO assignment, in order to activate the new PDO assignment,
a) the EtherCAT slave has to run through the PS status transition cycle (from pre-operational to
safe-operational) once (see Online tab [} 113]),
b) and the System Manager has to reload the EtherCAT slaves

( button for TwinCAT 2 or button for TwinCAT 3)

PDO list

List of all PDOs supported by this EtherCAT device. The content of the selected PDOs is displayed in the
PDO Content list. The PDO configuration can be modified by double-clicking on an entry.

Column Description
Index PDO index.
Size Size of the PDO in bytes.
Name Name of the PDO.
If this PDO is assigned to a Sync Manager, it appears as a variable of the slave with this
parameter as the name.
Flags F Fixed content: The content of this PDO is fixed and cannot be changed by the
System Manager.
M Mandatory PDO. This PDO is mandatory and must therefore be assigned to a
Sync Manager! Consequently, this PDO cannot be deleted from the PDO
Assignment list
SM Sync Manager to which this PDO is assigned. If this entry is empty, this PDO does not take
part in the process data traffic.
SU Sync unit to which this PDO is assigned.

PDO Content

Indicates the content of the PDO. If flag F (fixed content) of the PDO is not set the content can be modified.

EL252x Version: 4.3 115


Commissioning

Download

If the device is intelligent and has a mailbox, the configuration of the PDO and the PDO assignments can be
downloaded to the device. This is an optional feature that is not supported by all EtherCAT slaves.

PDO Assignment

If this check box is selected, the PDO assignment that is configured in the PDO Assignment list is
downloaded to the device on startup. The required commands to be sent to the device can be viewed in the
Startup [} 110] tab.

PDO Configuration

If this check box is selected, the configuration of the respective PDOs (as shown in the PDO list and the
PDO Content display) is downloaded to the EtherCAT slave.

6.2.8 Import/Export of EtherCAT devices with SCI and XTI

SCI and XTI Export/Import – Handling of user-defined modified EtherCAT slaves

6.2.8.1 Basic principles


An EtherCAT slave is basically parameterized through the following elements:
• Cyclic process data (PDO)
• Synchronization (Distributed Clocks, FreeRun, SM-Synchron)
• CoE parameters (acyclic object dictionary)

Note: Not all three elements may be present, depending on the slave.

For a better understanding of the export/import function, let's consider the usual procedure for IO
configuration:
• The user/programmer processes the IO configuration in the TwinCAT system environment. This
involves all input/output devices such as drives that are connected to the fieldbuses used.
Note: In the following sections, only EtherCAT configurations in the TwinCAT system environment are
considered.
• For example, the user manually adds devices to a configuration or performs a scan on the online
system.
• This results in the IO system configuration.
• On insertion, the slave appears in the system configuration in the default configuration provided by the
vendor, consisting of default PDO, default synchronization method and CoE StartUp parameter as
defined in the ESI (XML device description).
• If necessary, elements of the slave configuration can be changed, e.g. the PDO configuration or the
synchronization method, based on the respective device documentation.

It may become necessary to reuse the modified slave in other projects in this way, without having to make
equivalent configuration changes to the slave again. To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
• Export the slave configuration from the project,
• Store and transport as a file,
• Import into another EtherCAT project.

TwinCAT offers two methods for this purpose:


• within the TwinCAT environment: Export/Import as xti file or
• outside, i.e. beyond the TwinCAT limits: Export/Import as sci file.

116 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

An example is provided below for illustration purposes: an EL3702 terminal with standard setting is switched
to 2-fold oversampling (blue) and the optional PDO "StartTimeNextLatch" is added (red):

The two methods for exporting and importing the modified terminal referred to above are demonstrated
below.

6.2.8.2 Procedure within TwinCAT with xti files


Each IO device can be exported/saved individually:

The xti file can be stored:

and imported again in another TwinCAT system via "Insert Existing item":

EL252x Version: 4.3 117


Commissioning

6.2.8.3 Procedure within and outside TwinCAT with sci file


Note regarding availability (2021/01)

The SCI method is available from TwinCAT 3.1 build 4024.14.

The Slave Configuration Information (SCI) describes a specific complete configuration for an EtherCAT slave
(terminal, box, drive...) based on the setting options of the device description file (ESI, EtherCAT Slave
Information). That is, it includes PDO, CoE, synchronization.

Export:
• select a single device via the menu (multiple selection is also possible):
TwinCAT → EtherCAT Devices → Export SCI.

• If TwinCAT is offline (i.e. if there is no connection to an actual running controller) a warning message
may appear, because after executing the function the system attempts to reload the EtherCAT
segment. However, in this case this is not relevant for the result and can be acknowledged by clicking
OK:

118 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

• A description may also be provided:

• Explanation of the dialog box:


Name Name of the SCI, assigned by the user.
Description Description of the slave configuration for the use case, assigned by the user.
Options Keep modules If a slave supports modules/slots, the user can decide whether these are to be exported or
whether the module and device data are to be combined during export.
AoE | Set AmsNetId The configured AmsNetId is exported. Usually this is network-dependent and cannot
always be determined in advance.
EoE | Set MAC and IP The configured virtual MAC and IP addresses are stored in the SCI. Usually these are
network-dependent and cannot always be determined in advance.
CoE | Set cycle The configured cycle time is exported. Usually this is network-dependent and cannot
time(0x1C3x.2) always be determined in advance.
ESI Reference to the original ESI file.
Export Save SCI file.

• A list view is available for multiple selections (Export multiple SCI files):

• Selection of the slaves to be exported:


◦ All:
All slaves are selected for export.

EL252x Version: 4.3 119


Commissioning

◦ None:
All slaves are deselected.
• The sci file can be saved locally:

• The export takes place:

Import
• An sci description can be inserted manually into the TwinCAT configuration like any normal Beckhoff
device description.
• The sci file must be located in the TwinCAT ESI path, usually under:
C:\TwinCAT\3.1\Config\Io\EtherCAT

• Open the selection dialog:

120 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

• Display SCI devices and select and insert the desired device:

Additional Notes
• Settings for the SCI function can be made via the general Options dialog
(Tools → Options → TwinCAT → Export SCI):

Explanation of the settings:


Default export AoE | Set AmsNetId Default setting whether the configured AmsNetId is exported.
options CoE | Set cycle time(0x1C3x.2) Default setting whether the configured cycle time is exported.
EoE | Set MAC and IP Default setting whether the configured MAC and IP addresses are exported.
Keep modules Default setting whether the modules persist.
Generic Reload Devices Setting whether the Reload Devices command is executed before the SCI
export.
This is strongly recommended to ensure a consistent slave configuration.

EL252x Version: 4.3 121


Commissioning

SCI error messages are displayed in the TwinCAT logger output window if required:

6.3 General Notes - EtherCAT Slave Application


This summary briefly deals with a number of aspects of EtherCAT Slave operation under TwinCAT. More
detailed information on this may be found in the corresponding sections of, for instance, the EtherCAT
System Documentation.

Diagnosis in real time: WorkingCounter, EtherCAT State and Status

Generally speaking an EtherCAT Slave provides a variety of diagnostic information that can be used by the
controlling task.

This diagnostic information relates to differing levels of communication. It therefore has a variety of sources,
and is also updated at various times.

Any application that relies on I/O data from a fieldbus being correct and up to date must make diagnostic
access to the corresponding underlying layers. EtherCAT and the TwinCAT System Manager offer
comprehensive diagnostic elements of this kind. Those diagnostic elements that are helpful to the controlling
task for diagnosis that is accurate for the current cycle when in operation (not during commissioning) are
discussed below.

Fig. 134: Selection of the diagnostic information of an EtherCAT Slave

In general, an EtherCAT Slave offers


• communication diagnosis typical for a slave (diagnosis of successful participation in the exchange of
process data, and correct operating mode)
This diagnosis is the same for all slaves.

as well as
• function diagnosis typical for a channel (device-dependent)
See the corresponding device documentation

The colors in Fig. Selection of the diagnostic information of an EtherCAT Slave also correspond to the
variable colors in the System Manager, see Fig. Basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis in the PLC.

122 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Colour Meaning
yellow Input variables from the Slave to the EtherCAT Master, updated in every cycle
red Output variables from the Slave to the EtherCAT Master, updated in every cycle
green Information variables for the EtherCAT Master that are updated acyclically. This means that
it is possible that in any particular cycle they do not represent the latest possible status. It is
therefore useful to read such variables through ADS.

Fig. Basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis in the PLC shows an example of an implementation of basic EtherCAT
Slave Diagnosis. A Beckhoff EL3102 (2-channel analogue input terminal) is used here, as it offers both the
communication diagnosis typical of a slave and the functional diagnosis that is specific to a channel.
Structures are created as input variables in the PLC, each corresponding to the process image.

Fig. 135: Basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis in the PLC

The following aspects are covered here:

EL252x Version: 4.3 123


Commissioning

Code Function Implementation Application/evaluation


A The EtherCAT Master's diagnostic At least the DevState is to be evaluated for
information the most recent cycle in the PLC.
updated acyclically (yellow) or provided The EtherCAT Master's diagnostic
acyclically (green). information offers many more possibilities
than are treated in the EtherCAT System
Documentation. A few keywords:
• CoE in the Master for communication
with/through the Slaves
• Functions from TcEtherCAT.lib
• Perform an OnlineScan
B In the example chosen (EL3102) the Status In order for the higher-level PLC task (or
EL3102 comprises two analogue input corresponding control applications) to be
• the bit significations may be
channels that transmit a single function able to rely on correct data, the function
found in the device
status for the most recent cycle. status must be evaluated there. Such
documentation
information is therefore provided with the
• other devices may supply process data for the most recent cycle.
more information, or none that
is typical of a slave
C For every EtherCAT Slave that has cyclic WcState (Working Counter) In order for the higher-level PLC task (or
process data, the Master displays, using corresponding control applications) to be
0: valid real-time communication in
what is known as a WorkingCounter, able to rely on correct data, the
the last cycle
whether the slave is participating communication status of the EtherCAT Slave
successfully and without error in the cyclic 1: invalid real-time communication must be evaluated there. Such information is
exchange of process data. This important, This may possibly have effects on therefore provided with the process data for
elementary information is therefore the process data of other Slaves the most recent cycle.
provided for the most recent cycle in the that are located in the same
System Manager SyncUnit
1. at the EtherCAT Slave, and, with
identical contents
2. as a collective variable at the
EtherCAT Master (see Point A)
for linking.
D Diagnostic information of the EtherCAT State Information variables for the EtherCAT
Master which, while it is represented at the Master that are updated acyclically. This
current Status (INIT..OP) of the
slave for linking, is actually determined by means that it is possible that in any particular
Slave. The Slave must be in OP
the Master for the Slave concerned and cycle they do not represent the latest
(=8) when operating normally.
represented there. This information cannot possible status. It is therefore possible to
be characterized as real-time, because it AdsAddr read such variables through ADS.
• is only rarely/never changed, except The ADS address is useful for
when the system starts up communicating from the PLC/task
via ADS with the EtherCAT Slave,
• is itself determined acyclically (e.g.
e.g. for reading/writing to the CoE.
EtherCAT Status)
The AMS-NetID of a slave
corresponds to the AMS-NetID of
the EtherCAT Master;
communication with the individual
Slave is possible via the port (=
EtherCAT address).

NOTE
Diagnostic information
It is strongly recommended that the diagnostic information made available is evaluated so that the
application can react accordingly.

CoE Parameter Directory

The CoE parameter directory (CanOpen-over-EtherCAT) is used to manage the set values for the slave
concerned. Changes may, in some circumstances, have to be made here when commissioning a relatively
complex EtherCAT Slave. It can be accessed through the TwinCAT System Manager, see Fig. EL3102, CoE
directory:

124 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 136: EL3102, CoE directory

EtherCAT System Documentation


The comprehensive description in the EtherCAT System Documentation (EtherCAT Basics --> CoE
Interface) must be observed!

A few brief extracts:


• Whether changes in the online directory are saved locally in the slave depends on the device. EL
terminals (except the EL66xx) are able to save in this way.
• The user must manage the changes to the StartUp list.

Commissioning aid in the TwinCAT System Manager

Commissioning interfaces are being introduced as part of an ongoing process for EL/EP EtherCAT devices.
These are available in TwinCAT System Managers from TwinCAT 2.11R2 and above. They are integrated
into the System Manager through appropriately extended ESI configuration files.

EL252x Version: 4.3 125


Commissioning

Fig. 137: Example of commissioning aid for a EL3204

This commissioning process simultaneously manages


• CoE Parameter Directory
• DC/FreeRun mode
• the available process data records (PDO)

Although the “Process Data”, “DC”, “Startup” and “CoE-Online” that used to be necessary for this are still
displayed, it is recommended that, if the commissioning aid is used, the automatically generated settings are
not changed by it.

The commissioning tool does not cover every possible application of an EL/EP device. If the available setting
options are not adequate, the user can make the DC, PDO and CoE settings manually, as in the past.

EtherCAT State: automatic default behaviour of the TwinCAT System Manager and manual operation

After the operating power is switched on, an EtherCAT Slave must go through the following statuses
• INIT
• PREOP
• SAFEOP
• OP

to ensure sound operation. The EtherCAT Master directs these statuses in accordance with the initialization
routines that are defined for commissioning the device by the ES/XML and user settings (Distributed Clocks
(DC), PDO, CoE). See also the section on "Principles of Communication, EtherCAT State Machine [} 23]" in
this connection. Depending how much configuration has to be done, and on the overall communication,
booting can take up to a few seconds.

The EtherCAT Master itself must go through these routines when starting, until it has reached at least the
OP target state.

The target state wanted by the user, and which is brought about automatically at start-up by TwinCAT, can
be set in the System Manager. As soon as TwinCAT reaches the status RUN, the TwinCAT EtherCAT
Master will approach the target states.

126 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Standard setting

The advanced settings of the EtherCAT Master are set as standard:


• EtherCAT Master: OP
• Slaves: OP
This setting applies equally to all Slaves.

Fig. 138: Default behaviour of the System Manager

In addition, the target state of any particular Slave can be set in the “Advanced Settings” dialogue; the
standard setting is again OP.

Fig. 139: Default target state in the Slave

Manual Control

There are particular reasons why it may be appropriate to control the states from the application/task/PLC.
For instance:

EL252x Version: 4.3 127


Commissioning

• for diagnostic reasons


• to induce a controlled restart of axes
• because a change in the times involved in starting is desirable

In that case it is appropriate in the PLC application to use the PLC function blocks from the TcEtherCAT.lib,
which is available as standard, and to work through the states in a controlled manner using, for instance,
FB_EcSetMasterState.

It is then useful to put the settings in the EtherCAT Master to INIT for master and slave.

Fig. 140: PLC function blocks

Note regarding E-Bus current

EL/ES terminals are placed on the DIN rail at a coupler on the terminal strand. A Bus Coupler can supply the
EL terminals added to it with the E-bus system voltage of 5 V; a coupler is thereby loadable up to 2 A as a
rule. Information on how much current each EL terminal requires from the E-bus supply is available online
and in the catalogue. If the added terminals require more current than the coupler can supply, then power
feed terminals (e.g. EL9410) must be inserted at appropriate places in the terminal strand.

The pre-calculated theoretical maximum E-Bus current is displayed in the TwinCAT System Manager as a
column value. A shortfall is marked by a negative total amount and an exclamation mark; a power feed
terminal is to be placed before such a position.

128 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 141: Illegally exceeding the E-Bus current

From TwinCAT 2.11 and above, a warning message “E-Bus Power of Terminal...” is output in the logger
window when such a configuration is activated:

Fig. 142: Warning message for exceeding E-Bus current

NOTE
Caution! Malfunction possible!
The same ground potential must be used for the E-Bus supply of all EtherCAT terminals in a terminal block!

EL252x Version: 4.3 129


Commissioning

6.4 Integration into the NC configuration


(Master: TwinCAT 2.11)

EtherCAT XML Device Description


The display matches that of the CoE objects from the EtherCAT XML Device Description. We
recommend downloading the latest XML file from the download area of the Beckhoff website and
installing it according to installation instructions.

Required firmware (FW) version and TwinCAT version


At least the FW version 07 is required for the connection of the EL2522 in the NC;
TwinCAT versions:
- from TC 2.11 R3 Build 2250
- from TC 3.1 Build 4018.16 (recommended)

1. The terminal must already have been inserted manually under I/O devices or have been scanned in by
the system (see section "Inserting the terminal in the EtherCAT Terminal network [} 94]").
2. First add a new task.
◦ To do this, click with the right mouse button on NC Configuration and
◦ select "Append task…" (see fig. Adding a new task).
◦ Rename the task if required and confirm with OK.

Fig. 143: Adding a new task

3. Select the operation mode of the terminal in the selection box Predefined PDO Assignment on the
register tab Process data.

Fig. 144: EL2522 - selection of the operation mode (default)

4. Adding an NC axis
◦ Right-click on Axes, then add a new axis (see Fig. Adding a new axis).

130 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Fig. 145: Adding an NC axis

5. Adding a new axis


◦ Name: Change the axis name if necessary
◦ Multiple: Enter the number of channels here in case of multi-channel operation. The corresponding
number of axes will then be inserted.
◦ Type: Select a continuous axis and confirm with OK (see Fig. Selecting and confirming the axis
type).

Fig. 146: Selecting and confirming the axis type

6. Linking the non-referenced axes to the terminal


◦ Left-click your axis to select it.
◦ Under the Settings tab select "Link To..." (see Fig. Linking the axis with the terminal).
◦ In the dialog Selection of I/O elements, select the desired terminal (e.g. terminal 3 (EL2522) #Ch.1
and confirm with OK.

EL252x Version: 4.3 131


Commissioning

Fig. 147: Linking the axis with the terminal

7. In the case of two-channel operation, also link the second axis with channel 2 of the EL2522.
8. All important links between the NC configuration and the terminal are thus carried out automatically for
the selected channels. The links are illustrated in the tree (A) and in the online view (B and C) (see fig.
Automatic linking of all main variables).

Fig. 148: Automatic linking of all main variables

9. Target counter value, AutomaticDirection and Target arrival time are not automatically linked under the
following conditions. Observe the following chapters here:
◦ EL252x - when using the predefined PDO Assignments "n Ch Standard 16 Bit (MDP 253/511)"
[} 134]

132 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

◦ EL2522 - when using the predefined PDO Assignments "n Ch Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511)
continuous position w. arrival time" [} 135]
◦ EL2522 - when using older FW or older TwinCAT versions with "Continuous Position" mode [} 135]
10. Setting of distributed clock: DC-Synchronous on "DC" tab

Fig. 149: Setting "DC-Synchron

11. Set the frequency of the terminal in order to achieve the required velocity
◦ Channel 1: Index 0x8000:12
◦ Channel 2: Index 0x8010:12

Fig. 150: Setting of “Base frequency 1” in Index 0x8000:12

EL252x Version: 4.3 133


Commissioning

6.4.1 EL252x - when using the predefined PDO Assignments "n Ch


Standard 16 Bit (MDP 253/511)"
The links from Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to the "Target Counter Value" of the terminal are not automatically
created in the operation modes "n Ch Standard 16 Bit".
Create the link from Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to the "Target Counter Value" of the terminal.
◦ To do this, right-click on Target counter value and
◦ select "Change link..." (see fig. Change link).

Fig. 151: Change Link

◦ In the dialog Variable linking, select the variable Axis/Drive/nOutData5 and confirm with OK (see A
and B in fig. Creating a link from Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to Target Counter Value).
◦ The coverage of 16 bits is confirmed in the subsequent dialog Variable size difference. Confirm
with OK (see C in fig. Creating a link from Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to Target Counter Value).

Fig. 152: Creating a link from Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to Target Counter Value

134 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.4.2 EL2522 - when using the predefined PDO Assignments "n Ch


Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511) continuous position w. arrival
time"
The process data object Target arrival time will not be automatically linked, because the data type UINT64 is
currently not supported by the TwinCAT PLC (see chapter “Data Type Comparison” in the TwinCAT 2
documentation).

6.4.3 EL2522 - when using older FW or older TwinCAT versions


with "Continuous Position" mode
the following must be observed if necessary:
• Update of the NC driver
• Add axes to the NC
• Linking Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to the Target Counter Value of the terminal

a)

b)

Fig. 153: Linking Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to the Target Counter Value of the terminal

• Link Axis/Drive/nCtrl1 to AutomaticDirection of the terminal

a)

EL252x Version: 4.3 135


Commissioning

b)

c)

Fig. 154: Link Axis/Drive/nCtrl1 to AutomaticDirection of the terminal

136 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.5 EL2521-xxxx

6.5.1 Basic function principles

6.5.1.1 Operation modes of the EL2521-xxxx


The terminals basically work as follows:
• Basic function
◦ Frequency setting, also: frequency modulation (setting: driving frequency)
(the number of pulses to be output is then usually monitored by the higher-level controller)
◦ or travel distance control (default: max. driving frequency, target position)
(the terminal automatically moves to a target position and continuously calculates the necessary
output frequency)
• Output mode selection
◦ Frequency modulation or
◦ Pulse-direction control or
◦ Incremental encoder

EtherCAT devices are parameterized via PDO (real-time process data) and CoE (acyclic parameters).
1. In order to be able to map the various application requirements, three EtherCAT setups are available for
selection in the first step via the so-called "predefined PDO":

Fig. 155: Predefined PDO selection in the TwinCAT System Manager

For new projects the "enhanced operation mode" 16 or 32-bit is the correct PDO choice.
The enhanced operation mode 16/32-bit was created by the further development of the EL2521. Older
EL2521 devices do not support this enhanced operation mode (see following table)! A terminal prior to
Firmware 03 / Hardware 02 [} 223] will not support configuration in enhanced operation mode, since the
corresponding objects cannot be controlled.
Version normal operation mode enhanced operation mode
16-bit (default) 32-bit
PDO settings Legacy (MDP 252) Standard 16-bit (MDP 253/511) Standard 32-bit (MDP 253/511)
Supported in FW/HW all from Firmware 03 / Hardware 02 [} 223]
ESI Revision from EL2521-xxxx-0000 EL2521-xxxx-1016 and higher
Supports distributed no yes
clocks
Process data Input process data (counter value) in CoE Inputs / Outputs in CoE object Inputs / Outputs in CoE object
object 0x6000 [} 159] 0x6010 [} 170] / 0x7010 [} 171] 0x6020 [} 170] / 0x7020 [} 171]
Output process data (Frequency value) in PDO assignment in PDO assignment in
CoE object 0x7000 [} 159] 0x1A01, 0x1A02, 0x1601, 0x1A01, 0x1A05
0x1602, 0x1604 0x1601, 0x1605, 0x1607
PDO assignment in 0x1A00, 0x1600
CoE parameters Feature bits and settings in CoE objects Feature bits and settings in CoE object
0x8000 [} 156], 0x8001 [} 157], 0x8010 [} 161]
0x8800 [} 157]
Recommended use In case of spare parts, not recommended Recommended mode when 16- Recommended mode if 16-bit
for new projects bit counters are sufficient counters are not sufficient

2. If required, the travel distance control can be activated (see chapter Travel distance control [} 140]).
3. In the last step the output mode has to be defined (see chapter Output mode [} 143]).

EL252x Version: 4.3 137


Commissioning

Compatibility in the case of service


An EL2521 employed and projected in enhanced operation mode cannot be replaced by an EL2521
with an older hardware version (<03)!

Process data monitoring


It is recommended to monitor the proper behavior of the terminal via the controller using the
diagnostic values:
• WcState: should be 0, if ≠ 0, then this EtherCAT device does not participate in the process data
traffic
• State: if ≠ 8, then the EtherCAT device is not in OP (Operational) state
• TxPDO State, SyncError: if ≠ 0, then there is no valid process data, e.g. due to wire breakage
• TxPDO Toggle: if this bit toggles, a new set of process data is available

Delivery state: frequency modulation

The delivery state of the EL2521 is the operation mode frequency modulation with a base frequency of
50 kHz and 15-bit resolution.

For testing in the delivery state, PDO setting Standard 16-bit, the output frequency can simply be set to a
value >0, then the EL2521-xxxx starts outputting signals.

The number of pulses output is read back into a 16-bit register. The counter overflows with a message to the
controller; this is indicated by the status word SW.3 [} 154] or index 0x6020:05 [} 170], overflow or SW.2
[} 154] or index 0x6020:04 [} 170] (underflow). In parallel to these two bits, SW.6 [} 154] or index 0x6010:07
[} 170] is set as a general error bit. This makes the extension to more than 16-bit easier for the controller
software to handle. Furthermore, the overflow can be read from the diagnostic object 0xA000:01 [} 159]
(internal 32-bit extension).

The counter can be cleared by bit 5 in the control word (CW.5 [} 153]). The counter is cleared in the delivery
state with a rising edge (feature bit set in index 0x8000:05 [} 156]); this function is level-controlled if the
feature bit in index 0x8000:05 [} 156] = 0. If the feature bit in index 0x8000:0B [} 156] = 1, then the counter is
set to a value specified in index 0x8800:01 [} 157] by bit 5 in the control word (CW.5 [} 153]).

The PDO "Go counter" in the ControlWord and "Target counter value", although always visible in the process
image, can only be used with activated travel distance control.

Relative data

The output frequency depends on the base frequency set in the objects 0x8001:02 [} 157] or 0x8010:12
[} 161] to 0x8001:03 [} 157] or 0x8010:13 [} 161] and the process data (see table).

Example:

Output frequency = base frequency x process data / 32767


highest resolution = 125 mHz

Base frequency = 100,000 Hz (maximum selected output frequency)


Process data = 0x00FF (255dec)
Output frequency = 778.22 Hz
Process data Output value
0x0000 (0dec) 0% DC
0x3FFF (16383dec) 50% of the base frequency, rotation to the right
0x7FFF (32767dec) 100% of the base frequency, rotation to the right
Two's complement 0xC000 (-16384dec) 50% of the base frequency, rotation to the left
0x8000 (-32768dec) 100% of the base frequency, rotation to the left
Signed amount representation 0xBFFF (-16383dec) 50% of the base frequency, rotation to the left
0xFFFF (-32767dec) 100% of the base frequency, rotation to the left

138 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Direct data

There is a possibility to directly input the frequency (object 0x8000:08 [} 156] or 0x8010:08 [} 161]). Here, the
process data are multiplied by the factor from object 0x8001:06 [} 157] or 0x8010:16 [} 161] and written
directly to the synthesis chip.

Example:

Output frequency = frequency factor x process data x 10 mHz


highest resolution = 10 mHz

Frequency factor = 100


process data = 0x00FF (255dec)
output frequency = 255 Hz

Ramp function

An internal ramp function increases/lowers the current frequency to the preset maximum frequency with the
preset parameters in index 0x8800:02 [} 157] “Maximum frequency” it is activated by index 0x8000:06 [} 156]
or 0x8010:06 [} 161] “Ramp function active”.

CoE parameters
The parameters are to be used depending on operation mode:
• "normal" from the objects 0x8000, 0x8001, 0x8800 or
• "enhanced", from the object 0x8010.

The base frequency of the ramp can be selected by index 0x8000:07 [} 156] or 0x8010:07 [} 161] “Ramp
base frequency”. Bit 1 of the status word (SW.1 [} 154]) or index 0x6010:02 [} 170] “Ramp active” is set when
a ramp is traversed.

The deactivation of this function, which can also take place during operation via CW.1 [} 153] or index
0x7010:02 [} 171] “Disable ramp”, results in the enabling of CW.0 [} 153] or index 0x7010:01 [} 171]
“Frequency select”. This allows the user to quickly change the base frequency during operation.
If CW.0 [} 153] or index 0x7010:01 [} 171] = 1 (confirmation by SW.0 [} 154] or index 0x6010:01 [} 170]), then
base frequency 2 in object 0x8001:03 [} 157] or 0x8010:13 [} 161] is used instead of base frequency 1 in
object 0x8001:02 [} 157] or 0x8010:12 [} 161] (CW.0 [} 153] or index 0x7010:01 [} 171] = 0).
The input signals T and Z are transferred by the terminal directly to the controller in the status word (SW.4
[} 154] / SW.5 [} 154]) or index 0x6010:05 [} 170] / 0x6010:06 [} 170]. The signals are not given any internal
pre-processing.

The terminal offers a facility for soft starting and stopping. Using index 0x8001:04 [} 157] or 0x8010:14 [} 161]
“Ramp time constant rising” the ramp gradient for starting can be set with an accuracy of 10 or 1000 Hz/sec
(index 0x8000:07 [} 156] or 0x8010:07 [} 161]). Index 0x8001:05 [} 157] or 0x8010:15 [} 161] “Ramp time
constant falling” has the same function for stopping. The process data can be modified during transit of the
ramp (CW.2 [} 153] or index 0x7010:03 [} 171] “Go counter”), and the terminal then takes the new value as
its target frequency.

Resolution

The base frequencies are specified with a resolution of 1 Hz per bit (base frequency 1: index 0x8001:02
[} 157] or 0x8010:12 [} 161] or base frequency 2: index 0x8001:03 [} 157] or 0x8010:13 [} 161]).

The terminal operates internally at 16 MHz with a resolution of 32 bits. This corresponds to a theoretical
minimum step size of 0.0037 Hz/step over the entire frequency range. The output stage allows a maximum
frequency of 500 kHz to be output.

EL252x Version: 4.3 139


Commissioning

6.5.1.2 Travel distance control


The travel distance control function can be activated in the CoE. Starting from the current counter value, a
target counter value is automatically approached via ramps, taking into account a maximum driving
frequency, and the corresponding pulses are output at the outputs. The output frequency thereby changes in
accordance with the current counter value.
When the preset counter value is reached, the terminal switches the frequency to zero. The output of an
exact number of pulses is only possible with this "travel distance control" function.

The sequence is determined by several factors, see figure [} 140]. Before parameterizing the travel distance
control, it is recommended to carry out a CoE reset "Restoring the delivery state [} 236]" in order to rule out
side effects.

The sequence and the associated parameters are listed in following table; in enhanced operation mode
some parameters are no longer in the CoE, but can be linked as process data.
Phase Normal operation mode Enhanced operation mode
Parameterization
Activate travel distance control 0x8000:0A = TRUE 0x8010:0A = TRUE
Basic ramp frequency (10 Hz / 1 kHz) 0x8000:07 = ? 0x8010:07 = ?
Ramp time constant "rising" t1 [Δ/sec] 0x8001:04 = ? 0x8010:14 = ?
Maximum driving frequency f1 0x8800:02 = ? ---
Ramp time constant "falling" t3 [Δ/sec] 0x8001:05 = ? 0x8010:15 = ?
(> 1.1 * ramp time constant “rising” t1
see note [} 140]!)
Output frequency f2 0x8001:07 = ? 0x8010:17 = ?
Trip
Specify target position 0x8800:01 = ? PDO: TargetCounterValue = ?
Trip start CW.2 = TRUE PDO: Control.GoCounter = TRUE
Maximum driving frequency f1 --- PDO: FrequencyValue <> 0
Reset
CW.2 = FALSE PDO: FrequencyValue = 0
PDO: Control.GoCounter = FALSE

Setting of “Go counter” in enhanced operation mode


In the case of travel distance control in enhanced operation mode, the "Go counter" bit must be set
at the same time or before specifying the "Frequency value".
If the "Go counter" bit is not set and the "Frequency value" is not equal to 0, then travel distance
control is not active and clock pulses are already output!

Ramp time constant


The "real" ramp time results from the multiplication of the basic ramp frequency with that of the
rising/falling ramp time constant.

Steepness of the falling ramp


In order to travel to a destination with precision, it is necessary that the time constant for the falling
ramp is greater than that of the rising ramp by a certain factor. This is necessary so that the slowing
down frequency is reached before the final counter state, so that the terminal does not drive up to
the end point at full speed.
To explain in more detail:
The EL2521 calculates the number of steps that are still to be taken in time t2 from time t1 and from
the number of steps that have been taken. The calculation for stopping assumes the same number
of steps as that found for starting up.
The downward ramp must be a little steeper, approx. 10 %, so that it is possible to reach the
destination exactly in the remaining time t3 + t4 + t5. This relationship changes with the maximum
frequency.

140 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Example of a travel distance ramp

Fig. 156: Phases of the travel distance control

By way of example, the recording of a short real travel distance ramp is shown here together with the sample
program used for it:

https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/el252x/Resources/1850209803/.zip
The short step sequence resets the current counter value to 0 and then drives to the target position 65. In
the System Manager file the EL2521-xxxx is set to the appropriate CoE values for this example via the
StartUp parameters.

Fig. 157: Sample travel distance control program

EL252x Version: 4.3 141


Commissioning

The result is the output of a variable frequency up to the target position 65.

Fig. 158: Oscilloscope recording of the pulse sequence

142 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.5.1.3 Output mode

Operation mode selection and output pattern

Apart from the operating mode FM (Frequency Modulation, index “Operation mode” 0x8000:0E [} 156] or
0x8010:0E [} 161] = 0dec), the EL2521 can also be used for stepper motor control with pulse-direction control
(Frq-Cnt pulse mode, index 0x8000:0E [} 156] or 0x8010:0E [} 161] = 1dec).

A further operation mode is incremental encoder simulation (index 0x8000:0E [} 156] or 0x8010:0E
[} 161] = 2dec). It is possible to connect the terminal output directly to an incremental encoder input, with
which many servo drives and frequency converters are equipped. The pulse pattern is output through
channels A and B. The necessary operation mode can be configured via the feature object 0x8000:0E [} 156]
or 0x8010:0E [} 161].

The operation modes differ primarily between the


• positive logic mode 0, 1, 2 and
• negative logic mode 4, 5, 6.
The negative logic can be activated with index “Negative logic” 0x8000:0F [} 156] or 0x8010:10 [} 161].

Operation modes 2 and 6 simulate an incremental encoder, and permit direct connection to an evaluation
unit such as a servo drive or frequency converter with an incremental encoder input.
Operating mode Parameterization Function
normal / enhanced operation mode Clockwise Counter clock-
rotation wise rotation
Frequency modulation “Operation mode”
positive logic (BA0) 0x8000:0E / 0x8010:0E = 0dec
“Negative logic”
0x8000:0F / 0x8010:10 = FALSE
Pulse-direction control “Operation mode”
positive logic (BA1) 0x8000:0E / 0x8010:0E = 1dec
“Negative logic”
0x8000:0F / 0x8010:10 = FALSE
Incremental encoder “Operation mode”
positive logic (BA2) 0x8000:0E / 0x8010:0E = 2dec
“Negative logic”
0x8000:0F / 0x8010:10 = FALSE
Frequency modulation “Operation mode”
negative logic (BA4) 0x8000:0E / 0x8010:0E = 0dec
“Negative logic”
0x8000:0F / 0x8010:10 = TRUE
Pulse-direction control “Operation mode”
negative logic (BA5) 0x8000:0E / 0x8010:0E = 1dec
“Negative logic”
0x8000:0F / 0x8010:10 = TRUE
Incremental encoder “Operation mode”
negative logic (BA6) 0x8000:0E / 0x8010:0E = 2dec
“Negative logic”
0x8000:0F / 0x8010:10 = TRUE

EL252x Version: 4.3 143


Commissioning

6.5.1.4 Device synchronization


The EL2521-xxxx can be synchronized via
• the EtherCAT cycle, so-called SM-synchron (Sync Manager)
• DistributedClocks (for availability see table Operation Modes)

Distributed clocks (DC)

EtherCAT and distributed clocks


A basic introduction into EtherCAT and distributed clocks can is available for download from the
Beckhoff website: "Distributed clocks system description".

The EL2521 supports the distributed clocks function. In order for the EL2521 to be able to make the current
process data available in time before the arrival of the querying EtherCAT datagram, a suitable signal must
be generated cyclically within the terminal. This signal can be triggered in the EL2521 by two events: the
SyncManager (SM) and the Distributed Clocks (DC). Under operation mode selection the following options
are available (see Fig. "DC tab"):
• FreeRun/SM-synchron
The SyncManager event occurs when an EtherCAT frame successfully exchanges process data with
the EL2521. Frame-triggered, the current process data are thus processed cyclically, but with the low
temporal jitter of the Ethernet frame.
• DC-synchron
In the DC operation mode, process data processing is constantly triggered cyclically by the integrated
DC unit, synchronous with the bus cycle as standard. More uniform polling offers higher-quality data for
a higher-level control algorithm, for example. In the EL2521 the SYNC0 signal acts as trigger.

Fig. 159: DC tab (Distributed Clocks)

When "DC Synchron" operation mode is activated TwinCAT selects settings that ensure reliable operation of
the EL2521 with current data. This means that the processing of the current process data is started by the
SYNC0 signal at highly constant intervals and in good time – i.e. with an adequate safety buffer – before the
retrieving EtherCAT datagram.

If necessary, the SYNC0 signal can be shifted along the time axis to the right/later or left/earlier in associated
dialogs by specifying a "User defined Shift Time", see Fig. "Advanced distributed clocks (DC) settings,
EL2521 Terminal".
• Through a shift to the right (positive shift value), the processing of the process data takes place later –
regarded relatively from the PLC the degree of currentness is thus increased. However, this increases
the risk that the provision may not be finished in time before the arrival of EtherCAT frame, so that no
current value is available in this cycle.
• Through a shift to the left (negative shift value) the processing of the process data takes place earlier –
the degree of currentness is thus decreased; however, the safety buffer is increased before the arrival
of the EtherCAT datagram. This setting may be useful in systems with high real-time jitter, if no
Industrial PCs from Beckhoff are used for control purposes, for example.

NOTE
Attention! Risk of device damage!
The mentioned notes and information should be used advisedly. The EtherCAT master automatically
allocates SYNC0 and SYNC1 settings that support reliable and timely process data acquisition. User
intervention at this point may lead to undesired behavior. If these settings are changed in the System
Manager, no plausibility checks are carried out on the software side. Correct function of the terminal with all
conceivable setting options cannot be guaranteed.

144 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

EL2521 DC settings

Fig. 160: Advanced settings for distributed clocks (DC), EL2521 Terminal

• SYNC0
Sync Unit Cycle: Multiple of the bus cycle time. The process data are periodically processed at this
interval (in µs).
• User defined
Arbitrary number up to 232 ns ≈ 4.3 secs. Decimal point values are possible.
• Shift Time
The Shift Time can be used to shift the SYNC0 pulse for this EL2521 relative to other terminals and the
global SYNC pulse in nanosecond steps. If the outputs of multiple EL2521 Terminals are to be written
at the same time, the same value must be entered here.
• Based on Input Reference
If this option is activated an additional "Input Shift" is added to the configurable terminal-specific
SYNC0 shift ("user defined"). This value is calculated and made available by the EtherCAT master
(SysMan/Solution Explorer → device (EtherCAT): EtherCAT tab → advanced settings → distributed
clocks → Input Shift Time, see corresponding figures). As a result, all the input terminals in the system
(EL1xxx, EL3xxx) read their inputs as close as possible to the time of the EtherCAT frame that will
fetch them, thereby supplying the most recent possible input data to the controller.
• Enable SYNC0
Automatically activated in "DC Synchron" operation mode.
• SYNC1
Additional SYNC pulse, derived from SYNC0 or from the DC itself. Not required for the EL2521.

Default setting

The cyclic writing of the outputs is triggered by the SYNC0 pulse (interrupt) from the DC in the EL2521. The
EtherCAT master sets the "Sync Unit Cycle" time value to the PLC cycle time and therefore the EtherCAT
cycle time as standard. According to figure "Advanced settings distributed": 4000 µs = 4 ms because
TwinCAT is in Config mode.

EL252x Version: 4.3 145


Commissioning

DC settings for EtherCAT master

Higher-level distributed clocks parameters can be modified under advanced settings for the EtherCAT
master. See also basic introduction into EtherCAT and downloading distributed clocks: "Distributed clocks
system description".

Fig. 161: EtherCAT Master, EtherCAT tab, Advanced Settings

Fig. 162: EtherCAT Master, Advanced Settings, Distributed Clocks

146 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.5.1.5 Additional Notes EL2521

Code Word

Code Word
The vendor reserves the right to adjust the terminals according to the vendor's specifications. The
code word is therefore at present reserved.

Input impedance

The input impedance of the selected target circuit must not overload the EL2521, otherwise the voltage
levels according to RS422 can no longer be reached.

6.5.1.6 Notes on EL2521-0124


The EL2521-0124 has a latch input and a 24 V compare output, which both operate in connection with the
position value.

Explanation on the basis of the associated process data:

Latch input, identical function as for EL encoder terminals


• PDO ENC Status (input)
◦ External latch valid
◦ Status of extern latch (current state of the latch input)
◦ Latch value
• PDO ENC Control (output)
◦ Enable latch extern on positive edge
◦ Enable latch extern on negative edge

Compare output "PLS" (Programmable Limit Switch)


• PLS Control:
◦ "Enable PLS":
= 0 Output can be switched manually via "Output"
= 1 Automatic switching function has control over the output
◦ Output
Switches the output (no function if "Enable PLS" =1)
◦ Switch on value
Switch-on value (the output is switched on when the counter reaches this value)
◦ Switch off value
Switch-off value (the output is switched off when the counter reaches this value)

EL252x Version: 4.3 147


Commissioning

Fig. 163: Process data EL2521-0124

148 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.5.2 Process data


The process data selection in the System Manager specifies the operation mode of the EL2521-xxxx. The
process data can be set according to the tables below for inputs and outputs either individually by hand or
via the predefined PDO selection with a single click.

Fig. 164: Predefined PDO selection in the TwinCAT System Manager

Three process data sets are available for the EL2521-xxxx and are listed in following table.

Sync Manager (SM)

PDO assignment of the SyncManager


SM3, PDO Assignment 0x1C13, inputs
Index assigned to PDO setting Index of excluded Size Name PDO content
PDOs (byte.bit) Index - Name
0x1A00 Legacy (MDP 252) 0x1A01 4.0 Inputs 0x6000:01 [} 159] - Status
(default 0x1A02 0x6000:02 [} 159] - Data in
)
0x1A05
0x1A01 Standard 16 bit (MDP 0x1A00 2.0 PTO Status 0x6010:01 [} 170] - Sel. Ack./End counter
253/511) 0x6010:02 [} 170] - Ramp active
Standard 32 bit (MDP 0x6010:05 [} 170] - Status of input target
253/511) 0x6010:06 [} 170] - Status of input zero
0x6010:07 [} 170] - Error
0x1C32:20 – Sync error
0x1801:09 [} 165] - TxPDO Toggle
0x1A02 Standard 16 bit (MDP 0x1A00 4.0 ENC Status 0x6020:03 [} 170] - Set counter done
253/511) 0x1A05 compact 0x6020:04 [} 170] - Counter underflow
0x6020:05 [} 170] - Counter overflow
0x1C32:20 – Sync error
0x1802:09 [} 165] - TxPDO Toggle
0x6020:11 [} 170] - Counter value
0x1A05 Standard 32 bit (MDP 0x1A00 6.0 ENC Status 0x6020:03 [} 170] - Set counter done
253/511) 0x1A02 0x6020:04 [} 170] - Counter underflow
0x6020:05 [} 170] - Counter overflow
0x1C32:20 – Sync error
0x1805:09 [} 165] - TxPDO Toggle
0x6020:11 [} 170] - Counter value

EL252x Version: 4.3 149


Commissioning

SM2, PDO assignment 0x1C12, outputs


Index assigned to PDO setting Index of excluded Size Name PDO content
PDOs (byte.bit) Index - hex
0x1600 Legacy (MDP 252) 0x1601 4.0 Inputs 0x7000:01 [} 159] - Ctrl
(default 0x1604 0x7000:02 [} 159] - Data out
) 0x1607
0x1602
0x1605
0x1601 Standard 16 bit (MDP 0x1600 4.0 PTO Control 0x7010:01 [} 171] - Frequency select
253/511) 0x7010:02 [} 171] - Disable ramp
Standard 32 bit (MDP 0x7010:03 [} 171] - Go counter
253/511) 0x7010:11 [} 171] - Frequency value
0x1604 Standard 16 bit (MDP 0x1600 2.0 PTO Target 0x7010:12 [} 171] - Target counter value
253/511) 0x1607 compact
0x1605
0x1607 Standard 32 bit (MDP 0x1600 4.0 PTO Target 0x7010:12 [} 171] - Target counter value
253/511) 0x1604
0x1602
0x1602 Standard 16 bit (MDP 0x1600 4.0 ENC Control 0x7020:03 [} 171] - Set counter
253/511) 0x1607 compact 0x7020:11 [} 171] - Set counter value
0x1605
0x1605 Standard 32 bit (MDP 0x1600 6.0 ENC Control 0x7020:03 [} 171] - Set counter
253/511) 0x1604 0x7020:11 [} 171] - Set counter value
0x1602

Process data setting options

The extent of process data can be set via the Process Data tab as described below.

150 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

PDO setting 1: Legacy (MDP 252)


• preset standard configuration in TwinCAT 2.10 (see note below for more up-to-date TwinCAT versions)
• to be used only in normal operation mode
• compatible with terminals up to and including FW02

Fig. 165: Process data and PDO assignment “Legacy (MDP 252)”

Standard configuration in TwinCAT


The further development of the EL2521-xxxx from FW03 also necessitates a new process image,
which is to be used preferentially in new systems. Therefore the standard configuration from
TwinCAT 2.11 onwards is normally PDO setting 2 (see below), with which an EL2521-xxxx inserted
manually or by scanning appears in the configuration. For reasons of compatibility with existing
software, however, some customers require PDO setting 1 "Legacy MDP253" to appear as the
standard configuration, even for newly created configurations. In this case the so-called
compatibility flag is to be set in the System Manager. Legacy is then selected as the standard PDO
configuration. Nevertheless the PDO can, of course, be converted/changed after inserting the
terminal into the configuration.

Fig.: Compatibility Mode in the System Manager from TwinCAT 2.11

EL252x Version: 4.3 151


Commissioning

PDO setting 2: Standard 16 bit (MDP 253/511)


• preset standard configuration in TwinCAT 2.11, TwinCAT 3
• to be used only in enhanced operating mode
• so-called compact process image, since it has only 16-bit-wide variables
• allows linking to NC axes according to MDP 253, subprofile 511

Fig. 166: Process data and PDO assignment “Standard 16-bit (MDP 253/511)”

PDO setting 3: Standard 32 bit (MDP 253/511)


• to be used only in enhanced operating mode
• 32-bit-wide variables
• allows linking to NC axes according to MDP 253, subprofile 511

Fig. 167: Process data and PDO assignment “Standard 32-bit (MDP 253/511)”

152 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.5.3 Normal operation mode

6.5.3.1 EL2521

6.5.3.1.1 Control and status word

Control word

The control word (CW) is located in the output process image, and is transmitted from the controller to the
terminal.
Bit CW.15 CW.14 CW.13 CW.12 CW.11 CW.10 CW.9 CW.8
Name - - - - - - - -

Bit CW.7 CW.6 CW.5 CW.4 CW.3 CW.2 CW.1 CW.0


Name - - CNT_CLR - - GO_COUNTER RAMP_DIS FREQ_SEL

Legend
Bit Name Description
CW.8 - CW.15 - - reserved
CW.7 - - reserved
CW.6 - - reserved
CW.5 CNT_CLR 1bin The counter value is cleared or set by this bit (index 0x8000:0B [} 156]). Any overflow/
underflow bits that have been set are also cleared by this bit.
This process can be edge-controlled or level-controlled (index 0x8000:05 [} 156]).
CW.4 - - reserved
CW.3 - - reserved
CW.2 GO_COUNTER 1bin If travel distance control is activated (index 0x8000:0A [} 156]), a specified counter
value is driven to if the bit is set.
CW.1 RAMP_DIS 1bin The ramp function is disabled despite active index 0x8000:06 [} 156]; if the travel
distance control is active it is aborted by this bit.
CW.0 FREQ_SEL 0bin / 1bin Fast toggling of the base frequency (only if ramp function is deactivated)
0bin = base frequency 1 (index 0x8001:02 [} 157])
1bin = base frequency 2 (index 0x8001:03 [} 157])

EL252x Version: 4.3 153


Commissioning

Status word

The status word (SW) is located in the input process image, and is transmitted from terminal to the controller.
Bit SW.15 SW.14 SW.13 SW.12 SW.11 SW.10 SW.9 SW.8
Name - - - - - - - -

Bit SW.7 SW.6 SW.5 SW.4 SW.3 SW.2 SW.1 SW.0


Name - ERROR INPUT_Z INPUT_T OVERFLOW UNDERFLOW RAMP_ACTIVE SEL_ACK/
END_COUNTER

Legend
Bit Name Description
SW.8 - SW.15 - - reserved
SW.7 - - reserved
SW.6 ERROR 1bin General error bit, is set together with overrange and underrange
SW.5 INPUT_Z 1bin Status of the input INPUT_Z
SW.4 INPUT_T 1bin Status of the input INPUT_T
SW.3 OVERFLOW 1bin This bit is set if the 16-bit counter overflows (65535 -> 0).
It is reset when the counter exceeds one third of its measuring range (21845 -> 21846)
or immediately an underflow occurs.
SW.2 UNDERFLOW 1bin This bit is set if the 16-bit counter underflows (0 -> 65535).
It is reset when the counter drops below two thirds of its measuring range (43690 ->
43689) or immediately an overflow occurs.
SW.1 RAMP_ACTIVE 1bin Ramp is currently being followed
SW.0 SEL_ACK/ 1bin Confirms the change of base frequency.
END_COUNTER If travel distance control is activated: target counter value reached

6.5.3.1.2 Object description and parameterization


EtherCAT XML Device Description
The display matches that of the CoE objects from the EtherCAT XML Device Description. We
recommend downloading the latest XML file from the download area of the Beckhoff website and
installing it according to installation instructions.

Parameterization via the CoE list (CAN over EtherCAT)


The terminal is parameterized via the CoE - Online tab (double-click on the respective object) or via
the Process Data tab (allocation of PDOs). Please note the following general CoE information [} 25]
when using/manipulating the CoE parameters:
• Keep a startup list if components have to be replaced
• Differentiation between online/offline dictionary, existence of current XML description
• “CoE-Reload” for resetting the changes

Introduction

The CoE overview contains objects for different intended applications:


• Objects required for parameterization [} 155] during commissioning
• Objects intended for regular operation [} 157], e.g. through ADS access.
• Objects for indicating internal settings [} 157] (may be fixed)

The following section first describes the objects required for normal operation, followed by a complete
overview of missing objects.

154 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Objects for commissioning

Index 0x1011 Restore default parameters


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1011:0 Restore default Restore default settings UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
parameters
1011:01 SubIndex 001 If this object is set to "0x64616F6C" in the Set Value UINT32 RW 0x00000000
Dialog, all backup objects are reset to their delivery (0dec)
state.

EL252x Version: 4.3 155


Commissioning

Index 0x8000 Feature bits


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8000:0 Feature bits Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x0F (15dec)
8000:02 Emergency ramp TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
active If the watchdog timer responds, the terminal ramps with
the time constant set in object 0x8001:08 [} 157] to the
value set in object 0x8001:01 [} 157].
FALSE
The function is deactivated
8000:03 Watchdog timer The SM watchdog is evaluated here. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
inactive
TRUE
The watchdog timer is deactivated
FALSE
The watchdog timer is activated in the delivery state.
Either the manufacturer's of the user's switch-on value
is output if the watchdog overflows.
8000:04 Sign/amount TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
representation The output value is displayed in signed amount
representation:
-2dec= 0x8002
-1dec= 0x8001
1dec= 0x0001
2dec= 0x0002
FALSE
The output value is output as signed integer in the
two's complement:
-2dec= 0xFFFE
-1dec= 0xFFFF
1dec= 0x0001
2dec= 0x0002
8000:05 Rising edge clears/ TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x01 (1dec)
sets counter The counter is cleared/set on a rising edge of the
Counter_Clear bit in the control word (CW.5 [} 153])
FALSE
The counter is cleared/set on a positive level of the
Counter_Clear bit in the control word (CW.5 [} 153])
8000:06 Ramp function active TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x01 (1dec)
Ramp function activated
FALSE
Ramp function deactivated
The ramp controller should only be deactivated if a
higher-level controller (e.g. NC controller) takes over
the control of travel distance and frequency.
8000:07 Ramp base frequency 0(dec) BIT1 RW 0x00 (0dec)
Ramp base frequency: 10 Hz (pull-down menu)
1(dec)
Ramp base frequency: 1 kHz (pull-down menu)
8000:08 Direct input mode TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
Direct input mode
FALSE
Relative input mode
8000:09 User switch-on value TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
on wdt Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: User switch-on
value
FALSE
Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: Manufacturer's
switch-on value
8000:0A Travel distance TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
control active Travel distance control activated
FALSE
Travel distance control deactivated

156 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default


8000:0B Rising edge sets TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
counter Rising edge sets counter
FALSE
Rising edge clears counter
8000:0E Operating mode 0(dec) BIT2 RW 0x00 (0dec)
Frequency modulation operating mode (pull-down
menu)
1(dec)
Pulse direction specification operating mode (pull-down
menu)
2(dec)
Incremental encoder operating mode (pull-down menu)
8000:0F Negative logic TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
Negative logic
FALSE
Positive logic

Index 0x8001 User settings


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8001:0 User settings Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x08 (8dec)
8001:01 User switch-on-value User switch-on value (frequency) UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
8001:02 Base frequency 1 Base frequency 1 = 50000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x0000C350
(50000dec)
8001:03 Base frequency 2 Base frequency 2 = 100000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x000186A0
(100000dec)
8001:04 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant (rising, [1/sec]) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(rising) (1000dec)
The "real" ramp time is obtained by the multiplication of
the ramp base frequency by this ramp time constant.
8001:05 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant (falling, [1/sec]) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(falling) (1000dec)
The "real" ramp time is obtained by the multiplication of
the ramp base frequency by this ramp time constant.
8001:06 Frequency factor Frequency factor (direct input, digit x 10 mHz) UINT16 RW 0x0064 (100dec)
(digit x 10 mHz)
8001:07 Slowing down Slowing down frequency, travel distance control UINT16 RW 0x0032 (50dec)
frequency
8001:08 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant for controlled switch-off; UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(emergency) User switch-on value is driven to (object 0x8001:01) (1000dec)

Index 0x8800 Volatile settings


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8800:0 Volatile settings Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
8800:01 Target counter state Target counter value UINT32 RW 0x00000000
(0dec)
8800:02 Maximum frequency Maximum frequency UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)

Objects for regular operation


In normal operating mode the EL2521 has no such objects.

Standard objects (0x1000-0x1FFF)


The standard objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves.

Index 0x1000 Device type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1000:0 Device type Device type of the EtherCAT slave: The Lo-Word UINT32 RO 0x00001389
contains the CoE profile used (5001). The Hi-Word (5001dec)
contains the module profile according to the modular
device profile.

EL252x Version: 4.3 157


Commissioning

Index 0x1008 Device name


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1008:0 Device name Device name of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO EL2521

Index 0x1009 Hardware version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1009:0 Hardware version Hardware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 01

Index 0x100A Software version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
100A:0 Software version Firmware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 02

Index 0x1018 Identity


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1018:0 Identity Information for identifying the slave UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1018:01 Vendor ID Vendor ID of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x30520002
(810680322dec)
1018:02 Product code Product code of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x000009D9
(2521dec)
1018:03 Revision Revision number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Word UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(bit 0-15) indicates the special terminal number, the (0dec)
High Word (bit 16-31) refers to the device description
1018:04 Serial number Serial number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Byte (bit UINT32 RO 0x00000000
0-7) of the Low Word contains the year of production, (0dec)
the High Byte (bit 8-15) of the Low Word contains the
week of production, the High Word (bit 16-31) is 0

Index 0x1600 Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1600:0 RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1600:01 RxPDO-Mapping 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (Outputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x7000:01, 16
Element 1: Ctrl 0x01 (Ctrl))
1600:02 RxPDO-Mapping 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (Outputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x7000:02, 16
Element 2: Data out 0x02 (Data Out))

Index 0x1A00 Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A00:0 TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1A00:01 TxPDO-Mapping 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (Inputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x6000:01, 16
Element 1: Status 0x01 (Status))
1A00:02 TxPDO-Mapping 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (Inputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x6000:02, 16
Element 2: Data in 0x02 (Data In))

Index 0x1C00 Sync manager type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C00:0 Sync manager type Using the Sync Managers UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1C00:01 SubIndex 001 Sync-Manager Type Channel 1: Mailbox Write UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
1C00:02 SubIndex 002 Sync-Manager Type Channel 2: Mailbox Read UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1C00:03 SubIndex 003 Sync-Manager Type Channel 3: Process Data Write UINT8 RO 0x03 (3dec)
(Outputs)
1C00:04 SubIndex 004 Sync-Manager Type Channel 4: Process Data Read UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
(Inputs)

Index 0x1C01 Process data format


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C01:0 Process data format Process data format UINT16 RW 0x0100 (256dec)

158 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1C12 SM 0002 RxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C12:0 RxPDO assign PDO Assign Outputs UINT8 RW 0x01 (1dec)
1C12:01 Assigned RxPDO 1. allocated RxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1600
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5632dec)

Index 0x1C13 TxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C13:0 TxPDO assign PDO Assign Inputs UINT8 RW 0x01 (1dec)
1C13:01 Assigned TxPDO 1. allocated TxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1A00
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6656dec)

Profile-specific objects (0x6000-0xFFFF)


The profile-specific objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves that support the profile 5001.

Index 0x6000 Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6000:0 Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
6000:01 Status Status Word [} 153] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
6000:02 Data In Input process data (counter value) UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)

Index 0x7000 Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7000:0 Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
7000:01 Ctrl Control Word [} 153] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
7000:02 Data Out Output process data (frequency value) UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)

Index 0xA000 Diagnostic parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
A000:0 Diagnostic parameter Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
A000:01 Counter extension Counter extension UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)

Index 0xF000 Profile settings


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F000:0 Modular device profile General information for the modular device profile UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
F000:01 Module index Index distance of the objects of the individual channels UINT16 RO 0x0010 (16dec)
distance
F000:02 Maximum number of Number of channels UINT16 RO 0x0001 (1dec)
modules

Index 0xF008 Code word


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F008:0 Code word currently reserved UINT32 RW 0x00000000
(0dec)

EL252x Version: 4.3 159


Commissioning

6.5.4 Enhanced operation mode

6.5.4.1 EL2521, EL2521-0024, EL2521-0025

6.5.4.1.1 Object description and parameterization - enhanced operation mode


EtherCAT XML Device Description
The display matches that of the CoE objects from the EtherCAT XML Device Description. We
recommend downloading the latest XML file from the download area of the Beckhoff website and
installing it according to installation instructions.

Parameterization via the CoE list (CAN over EtherCAT)


The terminal is parameterized via the CoE - Online tab (double-click on the respective object) or via
the Process Data tab (allocation of PDOs). Please note the following general CoE information [} 25]
when using/manipulating the CoE parameters:
• Keep a startup list if components have to be replaced
• Differentiation between online/offline dictionary, existence of current XML description
• “CoE-Reload” for resetting the changes

Introduction

The CoE overview contains objects for different intended applications:


• Objects required for parameterization [} 160] during commissioning
• Objects intended for regular operation [} 162], e.g. through ADS access.
• Objects for indicating internal settings [} 162] (may be fixed)

The following section first describes the objects required for normal operation, followed by a complete
overview of missing objects.

Objects for commissioning

Index 0x1011 Restore default parameters


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1011:0 Restore default Restore default settings UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
parameters
1011:01 SubIndex 001 If this object is set to "0x64616F6C" in the Set Value UINT32 RW 0x00000000
Dialog, all backup objects are reset to their delivery (0dec)
state.

160 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x8010 PTO Settings


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8010:0 PTO Settings Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x18 (24dec)
8010:02 Emergency ramp TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
active If the watchdog timer responds, the terminal ramps with
the time constant set in object 8001:08
0x8010:18 [} 161] to the value set in object 8001:01
0x8010:11 [} 161].
FALSE
The function is deactivated
8010:03 Watchdog timer The SM watchdog is evaluated here. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
inactive
TRUE
The watchdog timer is deactivated
FALSE
The watchdog timer is activated in the delivery state.
Either the manufacturer's of the user's switch-on value
is output if the watchdog overflows
8010:04 Sign/amount TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
representation The output value is displayed in signed amount
representation:
-2dec= 0x8002
-1dec= 0x8001
1dec= 0x0001
2dec= 0x0002
FALSE
The output value is output as signed integer in the
two's complement:
-2dec= 0xFFFE
-1dec= 0xFFFF
1dec= 0x0001
2dec= 0x0002
8010:06 Ramp function active TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x01 (1dec)
Ramp function activated
FALSE
Ramp function deactivated
The ramp controller should only be deactivated if a
higher-level controller (e.g. NC controller) takes over
the control of travel distance and frequency.
8010:07 Ramp base frequency 0(dec) BIT1 RW 0x00 (0dec)
Ramp base frequency: 10 Hz (pull-down menu)
1(dec)
Ramp base frequency: 1 kHz (pull-down menu)
8010:08 Direct input mode TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
Direct input mode
FALSE
Relative input mode
8010:09 User switch-on value TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
on wdt Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: User switch-on
value
FALSE
Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: Manufacturer's
switch-on value
8010:0A Travel distance TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
control active Travel distance control activated
FALSE
Travel distance control deactivated

EL252x Version: 4.3 161


Commissioning

Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default


8010:0E Operating mode 0(dec) BIT2 RW 0x00 (0dec)
Frequency modulation operating mode (pull-down
menu)
1(dec)
Pulse direction specification operating mode (pull-down
menu)
2(dec)
Incremental encoder operating mode (pull-down menu)
8010:10 Negative logic TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
Negative logic
FALSE
Positive logic
8010:11 User switch-on-value User switch-on value (frequency) UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
8010:12 Base frequency 1 Base frequency 1 = 50000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x0000C350
(50000dec)
8010:13 Base frequency 2 Base frequency 2 = 100000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x000186A0
(100000dec)
8010:14 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant (rising) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(rising) (1000dec)
8010:15 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant (falling) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(falling) (1000dec)
8010:16 Frequency factor Frequency factor (direct input, digit x 10 mHz) UINT16 RW 0x0064 (100dec)
(digit x 10 mHz)
8010:17 Slowing down Slowing down frequency, travel distance control UINT16 RW 0x0032 (50dec)
frequency
8010:18 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant for controlled switch-off; UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(emergency) User switch-on value is driven to (object 0x8001:01 (1000dec)
0x8010:11 [} 161])

Objects for regular operation


In enhanced operating mode the EL2521 has no such objects.

Standard objects (0x1000-0x1FFF)


The standard objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves.

Index 0x1000 Device type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1000:0 Device type Device type of the EtherCAT slave: The Lo-Word UINT32 RO 0x00001389
contains the CoE profile used (5001). The Hi-Word (5001dec)
contains the module profile according to the modular
device profile.

Index 0x1008 Device name


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1008:0 Device name Device name of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO EL2521

Index 0x1009 Hardware version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1009:0 Hardware version Hardware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 05

Index 0x100A Software version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
100A:0 Software version Firmware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 06

162 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1018 Identity


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1018:0 Identity Information for identifying the slave UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1018:01 Vendor ID Vendor ID of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x00000002
(2dec)
1018:02 Product code Product code of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x09D93052
(165228626dec)
1018:03 Revision Revision number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Word UINT32 RO 0x03F80000
(bit 0-15) indicates the special terminal number, the (66584576dec)
High Word (bit 16-31) refers to the device description
1018:04 Serial number Serial number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Byte (bit UINT32 RO 0x00000000
0-7) of the Low Word contains the year of production, (0dec)
the High Byte (bit 8-15) of the Low Word contains the
week of production, the High Word (bit 16-31) is 0

Index 0x10F0 Backup parameter handling


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
10F0:0 Backup parameter Information for standardized loading and saving of UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
handling backup entries
10F0:01 Checksum Checksum across all backup entries of the EtherCAT UINT32 RO 0x00000000
slave (0dec)

Index 0x1400 RxPDO-Par


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1400:0 RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
1400:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index (hex) of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 04 16 07
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[10] 16 02 16 05 16
RxPDO 1

Index 0x1401 PTO RxPDO-Par Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1401:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control
1401:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index (hex) of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 00 00 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[10] 00 00 00 00 00
RxPDO 2

Index 0x1402 ENC RxPDO-Par Control compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1402:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control compact
1402:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index (hex) of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 05 16 07
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[10] 16 00 00 00 00
RxPDO 3

Index 0x1404 PTO RxPDO-Par Target compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1404:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target compact
1404:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index (hex) of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 05 16 07
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[10] 16 00 00 00 00
RxPDO 5

Index 0x1405 ENC RxPDO-Par Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1405:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control
1405:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index (hex) of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 02 16 04
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[10] 16 00 00 00 00
RxPDO 6

EL252x Version: 4.3 163


Commissioning

Index 0x1407 PTO RxPDO-Par Target


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1407:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 8 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target
1407:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index (hex) of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 02 16 04
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[10] 16 00 00 00 00
RxPDO 8

Index 0x1600 RxPDO-Map


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1600:0 RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1600:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (Outputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x7000:01, 16
0x01 (Ctrl))
1600:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (Outputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x7000:02, 16
0x02 (Data Out))

Index 0x1601 PTO RxPDO-Map Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1601:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control
1601:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:01, 1
entry 0x01 (Frequency select))
1601:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Disable ramp))
1601:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Go counter))
1601:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (5 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 5
1601:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1601:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Frequency value))

Index 0x1602 ENC RxPDO-Map Control compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1602:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control compact
1602:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1602:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter))
1602:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (5 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 5
1602:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1602:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x1604 PTO RxPDO-Map Target compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1604:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target compact
1604:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:12, 16
entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

164 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1605 ENC RxPDO-Map Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1605:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control
1605:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1605:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter))
1605:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (5 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 5
1605:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1605:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:11, 32
entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x1607 PTO RxPDO-Map Target


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1607:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 8 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target
1607:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:12, 32
entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1800 TxPDO-Par


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1800:0 TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
1800:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index (hex) of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 1A 02 1A 05
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 1A
TxPDO 1

Index 0x1801 PTO TxPDO-Par Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1801:0 PTO TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status
1801:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index (hex) of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 1A 00 00 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
TxPDO 2
1801:09 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled with each update the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
corresponding input data

Index 0x1802 ENC TxPDO-Par Status compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1802:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status compact
1802:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index (hex) of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 05 1A 00 1A 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
TxPDO 3
1802:09 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled with each update the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
corresponding input data

Index 0x1805 ENC TxPDO-Par Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1805:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status
1805:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index (hex) of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 02 1A 00 1A 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
TxPDO 6
1805:09 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled with each update the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
corresponding input data

EL252x Version: 4.3 165


Commissioning

Index 0x1A00 TxPDO-Map


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A00:0 TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1A00:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (Inputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x6000:01, 16
0x01 (Status))
1A00:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (Inputs), entry UINT32 RO 0x6000:02, 16
0x02 (Data In))

Index 0x1A01 PTO TxPDO-Map Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A01:0 PTO TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x0A (10dec)
Status
1A01:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:01, 1
entry 0x01 (Sel. Ack/End counter))
1A01:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Ramp active))
1A01:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A01:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:05, 1
entry 0x05 (Status of input target))
1A01:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:06, 1
entry 0x06 (Status of input zero))
1A01:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:07, 1
entry 0x07 (Error))
1A01:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (6 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 6
1A01:08 SubIndex 008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A01:09 SubIndex 009 9. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A01:0A SubIndex 010 10. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1801 (PTO TxPDO- UINT32 RO 0x1801:09, 1
Par Status), entry 0x09 (TxPDO-Toggle))

Index 0x1A02 ENC TxPDO-Map Status compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A02:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x0A (10dec)
Status compact
1A02:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A02:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A02:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A02:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:05, 1
entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A02:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (3 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 3
1A02:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (5 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 5
1A02:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A02:08 SubIndex 008 8. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A02:09 SubIndex 009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1802 (ENC TxPDO- UINT32 RO 0x1802:09, 1
Par Status compact), entry 0x09 (TxPDO-Toggle))
1A02:0A SubIndex 010 10. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Counter value))

166 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1A05 ENC TxPDO-Map Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A05:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x0A (10dec)
Status
1A05:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A05:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A05:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A05:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:05, 1
entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A05:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (3 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 3
1A05:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (5 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 5
1A05:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A05:08 SubIndex 008 8. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A05:09 SubIndex 009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1805 (ENC TxPDO- UINT32 RO 0x1805:09, 1
Par Status), entry 0x09 (TxPDO-Toggle))
1A05:0A SubIndex 010 10. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:11, 32
entry 0x11 (Counter value))

Index 0x1C00 Sync manager type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C00:0 Sync manager type Using the Sync Managers UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1C00:01 SubIndex 001 Sync-Manager Type Channel 1: Mailbox Write UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
1C00:02 SubIndex 002 Sync-Manager Type Channel 2: Mailbox Read UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1C00:03 SubIndex 003 Sync-Manager Type Channel 3: Process Data Write UINT8 RO 0x03 (3dec)
(Outputs)
1C00:04 SubIndex 004 Sync-Manager Type Channel 4: Process Data Read UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
(Inputs)

Index 0x1C12 RxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C12:0 RxPDO assign PDO Assign Outputs UINT8 RW 0x01 (1dec)
1C12:01 SubIndex 001 1. allocated RxPDO (contains the index (hex) of the UINT16 RW 0x1600
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5632dec)
1C12:02 SubIndex 002 2. allocated RxPDO (contains the index (hex) of the UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
associated RxPDO mapping object)
1C12:03 SubIndex 003 3. allocated RxPDO (contains the index (hex) of the UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
associated RxPDO mapping object)

Index 0x1C13 TxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C13:0 TxPDO assign PDO Assign Inputs UINT8 RW 0x01 (1dec)
1C13:01 SubIndex 001 1. allocated TxPDO (contains the index (hex) of the UINT16 RW 0x1A00
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6656dec)
1C13:02 SubIndex 002 2. allocated TxPDO (contains the index (hex) of the UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
associated TxPDO mapping object)

EL252x Version: 4.3 167


Commissioning

Index 0x1C32 SM output parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C32:0 SM output parameter Synchronization parameters for the outputs UINT8 RO 0x20 (32dec)
1C32:01 Sync mode Current synchronization mode: UINT16 RW 0x0001 (1dec)
• 0: Free Run
• 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event
• 2: DC-Mode - Synchron with SYNC0 Event
• 3: DC-Mode - Synchron with SYNC1 Event
1C32:02 Cycle time Cycle time (in ns): UINT32 RW 0x001E8480
(2000000dec)
• Free Run: Cycle time of the local timer
• Synchron with SM 2 Event: Master cycle time
• DC mode: SYNC0/SYNC1 Cycle Time
1C32:03 Shift time Time between SYNC0 event and output of the outputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:04 Sync modes Supported synchronization modes: UINT16 RO 0xC007
supported (49159dec)
• Bit 0 = 1: free run is supported
• Bit 1 = 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event is supported
• Bit 2-3 = 01: DC mode is supported
• Bit 4-5 = 10: Output Shift with SYNC1 event (only
DC mode)
• Bit 14 = 1: dynamic times (measurement through
writing of 0x1C32:08)
1C32:05 Minimum cycle time Minimum cycle time (in ns) UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C32:06 Calc and copy time Minimum time between SYNC0 and SYNC1 event (in UINT32 RO 0x00000000
ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:08 Command • 0: Measurement of the local cycle time is stopped UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
• 1: Measurement of the local cycle time is started
The entries 0x1C32:03, 0x1C32:05, 0x1C32:06,
0x1C32:09, 0x1C33:03 [} 169], 0x1C33:06 [} 168],
0x1C33:09 [} 169] are updated with the maximum
measured values.
For a subsequent measurement the measured values
are reset
1C32:09 Delay time Time between SYNC1 event and output of the outputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:0B SM event missed Number of missed SM events in OPERATIONAL (DC UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter mode only)
1C32:0C Cycle exceeded Number of occasions the cycle time was exceeded in UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter OPERATIONAL (cycle was not completed in time or
the next cycle began too early)
1C32:0D Shift too short counter Number of occasions that the interval between SYNC0 UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
and SYNC1 event was too short (DC mode only)
1C32:20 Sync error The synchronization was not correct in the last cycle BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
(outputs were output too late; DC mode only)

168 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1C33 SM input parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C33:0 SM input parameter Synchronization parameters for the inputs UINT8 RO 0x20 (32dec)
1C33:01 Sync mode Current synchronization mode: UINT16 RW 0x0022 (34dec)
• 0: Free Run
• 1: Synchron with SM 3 Event (no outputs
available)
• 2: DC - Synchron with SYNC0 Event
• 3: DC - Synchron with SYNC1 Event
• 34: Synchron with SM 2 Event (outputs available)
1C33:02 Cycle time as 0x1C32:02 [} 168] UINT32 RW 0x001E8480
(2000000dec)
1C33:03 Shift time Time between SYNC0 event and reading of the inputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:04 Sync modes Supported synchronization modes: UINT16 RO 0xC007
supported (49159dec)
• Bit 0: free run is supported
• Bit 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event is supported
(outputs available)
• Bit 1: Synchron with SM 3 Event is supported (no
outputs available)
• Bit 2-3 = 01: DC mode is supported
• Bit 4-5 = 01: Input Shift through local event
(outputs available)
• Bit 4-5 = 10: Input Shift with SYNC1 Event (no
outputs available)
• Bit 14 = 1: dynamic times (measurement through
writing of 0x1C32:08 [} 168] or 0x1C33:08 [} 169])
1C33:05 Minimum cycle time as 0x1C32:05 [} 168] UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C33:06 Calc and copy time Time between reading of the inputs and availability of UINT32 RO 0x00000000
the inputs for the master (in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:08 Command as 0x1C32:08 [} 168] UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
1C33:09 Delay time Time between SYNC1 event and reading of the inputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:0B SM event missed as 0x1C32:11 [} 168] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter
1C33:0C Cycle exceeded as 0x1C32:12 [} 168] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter
1C33:0D Shift too short counter as 0x1C32:13 [} 168] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
1C33:20 Sync error as 0x1C32:32 [} 168] BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)

Profile-specific objects (0x6000-0xFFFF)


The profile-specific objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves that support the profile 5001.

Index 0x6000 Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6000:0 Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
6000:01 Status Status Word [} 153] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
6000:02 Data In Input process data (counter value, index 0x6020:11 UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
[} 170])

EL252x Version: 4.3 169


Commissioning

Index 0x6010 PTO Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6010:0 PTO Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x10 (16dec)
6010:01 Sel. Ack/End counter Confirms the change of the base frequency. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
With activated travel distance control:
target counter value reached
6010:02 Ramp active Ramp is currently being followed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6010:05 Status of input target Status of the input TARGET (T) BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6010:06 Status of input zero Status of the input ZERO (Z) BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6010:07 Error General error bit, is set together with overrange and BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
underrange
6010:0E Sync Error The Sync error bit is only required for Distributed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
Clocks mode. It indicates whether a synchronization
error has occurred during the previous cycle.
6010:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO Toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.

Index 0x6020 ENC Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6020:0 ENC Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x16 (22dec)
6020:03 Set counter done Counter was set. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6020:04 Counter underflow This bit is set if the 16-bit counter underflows (0 -> BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
65535).
It is reset when the counter drops below two thirds of
its measuring range (43690 -> 43689) or immediately
an overflow occurs.
6020:05 Counter overflow This bit is set if the 16-bit counter overflows (65535 -> BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0).
It is reset when the counter exceeds one third of its
measuring range (21845 -> 21846) or immediately an
underflow occurs.
6020:0E Sync Error The Sync error bit is only required for Distributed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
Clocks mode. It indicates whether a synchronization
error has occurred during the previous cycle.
6020:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO Toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.
6020:11 Counter value Counter value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0x7000 Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7000:0 Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
7000:01 Ctrl Control Word [} 153] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
7000:02 Data Out Output process data (frequency value, index 0x7010:11 UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
[} 171])

170 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x7010 PTO Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7010:0 PTO Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x12 (18dec)
7010:01 Frequency select Fast toggling of the base frequency (only if ramp BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
function is deactivated)
0bin = base frequency 1 (object 8001:02 0x8010:12
[} 161])
1bin = base frequency 2 (object 8001:03 0x8010:13
[} 161])
7010:02 Disable ramp The ramp function is disabled despite active object BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8000:06
0x8010:06 [} 161]; if travel distance control is active, it
is aborted by this bit.
7010:03 Go counter With travel distance control activated (object BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8000:0A 0x8010:0A [} 161]) and bit set, a specified
counter value is driven to
7010:11 Frequency value Frequency value UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
7010:12 Target counter value Target counter value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0x7020 ENC Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7020:0 ENC Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x11 (17dec)
7020:03 Set counter Set counter value BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7020:11 Set counter value Counter value to be set via index 0x7020:03 [} 171] UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0xA000 Diagnostic parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
A000:0 Diagnostic parameter Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
A000:01 Counter extension Counter extension UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)

Index 0xF000 Modular device profile


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F000:0 Modular device profile General information for the modular device profile UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
F000:01 Module index Index distance of the objects of the individual channels UINT16 RO 0x0010 (16dec)
distance
F000:02 Maximum number of Number of channels UINT16 RO 0x0003 (3dec)
modules

Index 0xF008 Code word


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F008:0 Code word currently reserved UINT32 RW 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0xF010 Module list


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F010:0 Module list Max. Subindex UINT8 RW 0x03 (3dec)
F010:01 SubIndex 001 - UINT32 RW 0x000000FC
(252dec)
F010:02 SubIndex 002 - UINT32 RW 0x000000FD
(253dec)
F010:03 SubIndex 003 - UINT32 RW 0x000001FF
(511dec)

EL252x Version: 4.3 171


Commissioning

6.5.4.2 EL2521-0124

6.5.4.2.1 Object description and parameterization - enhanced operation mode


EtherCAT XML Device Description
The display matches that of the CoE objects from the EtherCAT XML Device Description. We
recommend downloading the latest XML file from the download area of the Beckhoff website and
installing it according to installation instructions.

Parameterization via the CoE list (CAN over EtherCAT)


The terminal is parameterized via the CoE - Online tab (double-click on the respective object) or via
the Process Data tab (allocation of PDOs). Please note the following general CoE information [} 25]
when using/manipulating the CoE parameters:
• Keep a startup list if components have to be replaced
• Differentiation between online/offline dictionary, existence of current XML description
• “CoE-Reload” for resetting the changes

Introduction

The CoE overview contains objects for different intended applications:


• Objects required for parameterization [} 172] during commissioning
• Objects intended for regular operation [} 174], e.g. through ADS access.
• Objects for indicating internal settings [} 174] (may be fixed)

The following section first describes the objects required for normal operation, followed by a complete
overview of missing objects.

Objects for commissioning

Index 0x1011 Restore default parameters


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1011:0 Restore default Restore default settings UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
parameters
1011:01 SubIndex 001 If this object is set to "0x64616F6C" in the Set Value UINT32 RW 0x00000000
Dialog, all backup objects are reset to their delivery (0dec)
state.

172 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x8000 PTA Settings


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8000:0 PTO Settings Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x18 (24dec)
8000:02 Emergency ramp TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
active If the watchdog timer responds, the terminal ramps with
the time constant set in object 0x8000:18 to the value
set in object 0x8000:11.
FALSE
The function is deactivated
8000:03 Watchdog timer TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
inactive The watchdog timer is deactivated
FALSE
The watchdog timer is activated in the delivery state.
Either the manufacturer's of the user's switch-on value
is output if the watchdog overflows
8000:04 Sign/amount TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
representation The output value is displayed in signed amount
representation:
-2dec= 0x8002
-1dec= 0x8001
1dec= 0x0001
2dec= 0x0002
FALSE
The output value is output as signed integer in the
two's complement:
-2dec= 0xFFFE
-1dec= 0xFFFF
1dec= 0x0001
2dec= 0x0002
8000:06 Ramp function active TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x01 (1dec)
Ramp function activated
FALSE
Ramp function deactivated
8000:07 Ramp base frequency 0(dec) BIT1 RW 0x00 (0dec)
Ramp base frequency: 10 Hz (pull-down menu)
1(dec)
Ramp base frequency: 1 kHz (pull-down menu)
8000:08 Direct input mode TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
Direct input mode
FALSE
Relative input mode
8000:09 User switch-on value TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
on wdt Behavior with triggered watchdog timer:
User switch-on value
FALSE
Behavior with triggered watchdog timer:
Manufacturer's switch-on value
8000:0A Travel distance TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
control active Travel distance control activated
FALSE
Travel distance control deactivated
8000:0B Output set active low Inversion of the output logic for output 24 V BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
0: HIGH level in switched state
1: LOW level in switched state

EL252x Version: 4.3 173


Commissioning

Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default


8000:0E Operating mode 0(dec) BIT2 RW 0x00 (0dec)
Frequency modulation operating mode (pull-down
menu)
1(dec)
Pulse direction specification operating mode (pull-down
menu)
2(dec)
Incremental encoder operating mode (pull-down menu)
8000:10 Negative logic TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
Negative logic
FALSE
Positive logic
8000:11 User switch-on-value User switch-on value (frequency) UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
8000:12 Base frequency 1 Base frequency 1 = 50000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x0000C350
(50000dec)
8000:13 Base frequency 2 Base frequency 2 = 100000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x000186A0
(100000dec)
8000:14 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant (rising) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(rising) (1000dec)
8000:15 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant (falling) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(falling) (1000dec)
8000:16 Frequency factor Frequency factor (direct input, digit x 10 mHz) UINT16 RW 0x0064 (100dec)
(digit x 10 mHz)
8000:17 Slowing down Slowing down frequency, travel distance control UINT16 RW 0x0032 (50dec)
frequency
8000:18 Ramp time constant Ramp time constant for controlled switch-off; UINT16 RW 0x03E8
(emergency) User switch-on value is driven to (object 0x8000:11) (1000dec)

Objects for regular operation


In enhanced operating mode the EL2521-0124 has no such objects.

Standard objects (0x1000-0x1FFF)


The standard objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves.

Index 0x1000 Device type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1000:0 Device type Device type of the EtherCAT slave: The Lo-Word UINT32 RO 0x00001389
contains the CoE profile used (5001). The Hi-Word (5001dec)
contains the module profile according to the modular
device profile.

Index 0x1008 Device name


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1008:0 Device name Device name of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO EL2521-0124

Index 0x1009 Hardware version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1009:0 Hardware version Hardware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 03

Index 0x100A Software version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
100A:0 Software version Firmware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 01

174 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1018 Identity


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1018:0 Identity Information for identifying the slave UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1018:01 Vendor ID Vendor ID of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x00000002
(2dec)
1018:02 Product code Product code of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x09D93052
(165228626dec)
1018:03 Revision Revision number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Word UINT32 RO 0x0010007C
(bit 0-15) indicates the special terminal number, the (1048700dec)
High Word (bit 16-31) refers to the device description
1018:04 Serial number Serial number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Byte (bit UINT32 RO 0x00000000
0-7) of the Low Word contains the year of production, (0dec)
the High Byte (bit 8-15) of the Low Word contains the
week of production, the High Word (bit 16-31) is 0

Index 0x10F0 Backup parameter handling


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
10F0:0 Backup parameter Information for standardized loading and saving of UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
handling backup entries
10F0:01 Checksum Checksum across all backup entries of the EtherCAT UINT32 RO 0x00000000
slave (0dec)

Index 0x1401 ENC RxPDO-Par Control compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1401:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control compact
1401:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 04 16 05 16 06
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 2

Index 0x1402 PLS RxPDO-Par Control compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1402:0 PLS RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control compact
1402:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 04 16 05 16 06
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 3

Index 0x1403 PTO RxPDO-Par Target compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1403:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 4 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target compact
1403:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 04 16 05 16 06
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 4

Index 0x1404 ENC RxPDO-Par Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1404:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control
1404:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 02 16 03
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 5

EL252x Version: 4.3 175


Commissioning

Index 0x1405 PLS RxPDO-Par Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1405:0 PLS RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control
1405:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 02 16 03
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 6

Index 0x1406 PTO RxPDO-Par Target


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1406:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 7 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target
1406:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 02 16 03
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 7

Index 0x1600 PTO RxPDO-Map Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1600:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control
1600:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7000:01, 1
entry 0x01 (Frequency select))
1600:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7000:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Disable ramp))
1600:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7000:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Go counter))
1600:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (5 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 5
1600:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1600:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7000:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Frequency value))

Index 0x1601 ENC RxPDO-Map Control compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1601:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x07 (7dec)
Control compact
1601:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1601:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Enable latch extern on positive edge))
1601:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter))
1601:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Enable latch extern on negative edge))
1601:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1601:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1601:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

176 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1602 PLS RxPDO-Map Control compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1602:0 PLS RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x07 (7dec)
Control compact
1602:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:01, 1
entry 0x01 (Enable PLS))
1602:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1602:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Output))
1602:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1602:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1602:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Switch on value))
1602:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:12, 16
entry 0x12 (Switch off value))

Index 0x1603 PTO RxPDO-Map Target compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1603:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 4 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target compact
1603:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7000:12, 16
entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1604 ENC RxPDO-Map Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1604:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x07 (7dec)
Control
1604:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1604:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Enable latch extern on positive edge))
1604:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter))
1604:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Enable latch extern on negative edge))
1604:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1604:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1604:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (ENC Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7010:11, 32
entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x1605 PLS RxPDO-Map Control


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1605:0 PLS RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x07 (7dec)
Control
1605:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:01, 1
entry 0x01 (Enable PLS))
1605:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1605:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Output))
1605:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1605:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1605:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:11, 32
entry 0x11 (Switch on value))
1605:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (PLS Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7020:12, 32
entry 0x12 (Switch off value))

EL252x Version: 4.3 177


Commissioning

Index 0x1606 PTO RxPDO-Map Target


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1606:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 7 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target
1606:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs), UINT32 RO 0x7000:12, 32
entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1801 ENC TxPDO-Par Status compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1801:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status compact
1801:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 04 1A
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[2]
TxPDO 2
1801:09 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled with each update the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
corresponding input data

Index 0x1804 ENC TxPDO-Par Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1804:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status
1804:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 1A
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[2]
TxPDO 5
1804:09 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled with each update the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
corresponding input data

Index 0x1A00 PTO TxPDO-Map Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A00:0 PTO TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x08 (8dec)
Status
1A00:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6000:01, 1
entry 0x01 (Sel. Ack/End counter))
1A00:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6000:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Ramp active))
1A00:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1A00:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6000:07, 1
entry 0x07 (Error))
1A00:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (6 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 6
1A00:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A00:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A00:08 SubIndex 008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1800, entry 0x09) UINT32 RO 0x1800:09, 1

178 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1A01 ENC TxPDO-Map Status compact


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A01:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x0D (13dec)
Status compact
1A01:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A01:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Latch extern valid))
1A01:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A01:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A01:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:05, 1
entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A01:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (3 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 3
1A01:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1A01:08 SubIndex 008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:0D, 1
entry 0x0D (Status of extern latch))
1A01:09 SubIndex 009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A01:0A SubIndex 010 10. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A01:0B SubIndex 011 11. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1801 (ENC TxPDO- UINT32 RO 0x1801:09, 1
Par Status compact), entry 0x09 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A01:0C SubIndex 012 12. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:11, 16
entry 0x11 (Counter value))
1A01:0D SubIndex 013 13. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:12, 16
entry 0x12 (Latch value))

Index 0x1A02 PLS TxPDO-Map Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A02:0 PLS TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x07 (7dec)
Status
1A02:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (PLS Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:01, 1
entry 0x01 (PLS Enabled))
1A02:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A02:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (PLS Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6020:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Status of output))
1A02:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (9 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 9
1A02:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A02:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A02:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1802, entry 0x09) UINT32 RO 0x1802:09, 1

EL252x Version: 4.3 179


Commissioning

Index 0x1A04 ENC TxPDO-Map Status


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A04:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x0D (13dec)
Status
1A04:01 SubIndex 001 1. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A04:02 SubIndex 002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:02, 1
entry 0x02 (Latch extern valid))
1A04:03 SubIndex 003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:03, 1
entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A04:04 SubIndex 004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:04, 1
entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A04:05 SubIndex 005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:05, 1
entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A04:06 SubIndex 006 6. PDO Mapping entry (3 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 3
1A04:07 SubIndex 007 7. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1A04:08 SubIndex 008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:0D, 1
entry 0x0D (Status of extern latch))
1A04:09 SubIndex 009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1C32 (SM output UINT32 RO 0x1C32:20, 1
parameter), entry 0x20 (Sync error))
1A04:0A SubIndex 010 10. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A04:0B SubIndex 011 11. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x1804 (ENC TxPDO- UINT32 RO 0x1804:09, 1
Par Status), entry 0x09 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A04:0C SubIndex 012 12. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:11, 32
entry 0x11 (Counter value))
1A04:0D SubIndex 013 13. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (ENC Inputs), UINT32 RO 0x6010:12, 32
entry 0x12 (Latch value))

Index 0x1C00 Sync manager type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C00:0 Sync manager type Using the Sync Managers UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1C00:01 SubIndex 001 Sync-Manager Type Channel 1: Mailbox Write UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
1C00:02 SubIndex 002 Sync-Manager Type Channel 2: Mailbox Read UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1C00:03 SubIndex 003 Sync-Manager Type Channel 3: Process Data Write UINT8 RO 0x03 (3dec)
(Outputs)
1C00:04 SubIndex 004 Sync-Manager Type Channel 4: Process Data Read UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
(Inputs)

Index 0x1C12 RxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C12:0 RxPDO assign PDO Assign Outputs UINT8 RW 0x03 (3dec)
1C12:01 SubIndex 001 1. allocated RxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1600
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5632dec)
1C12:02 SubIndex 002 2. allocated RxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1601
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5633dec)
1C12:03 SubIndex 003 3. allocated RxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1602
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5634dec)
1C12:04 SubIndex 004 4. allocated RxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
associated RxPDO mapping object)

Index 0x1C13 TxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C13:0 TxPDO assign PDO Assign Inputs UINT8 RW 0x03 (3dec)
1C13:01 SubIndex 001 1. allocated TxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1A00
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6656dec)
1C13:02 SubIndex 002 2. allocated TxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1A01
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6657dec)
1C13:03 SubIndex 003 3. allocated TxPDO (contains the index of the UINT16 RW 0x1A02
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6658dec)

180 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1C32 SM output parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C32:0 SM output parameter Synchronization parameters for the outputs UINT8 RO 0x20 (32dec)
1C32:01 Sync mode Current synchronization mode: UINT16 RW 0x0001 (1dec)
• 0: Free Run
• 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event
• 2: DC-Mode - Synchron with SYNC0 Event
• 3: DC-Mode - Synchron with SYNC1 Event
1C32:02 Cycle time Cycle time (in ns): UINT32 RW 0x001E8480
(2000000dec)
• Free Run: Cycle time of the local timer
• Synchron with SM 2 Event: Master cycle time
• DC mode: SYNC0/SYNC1 Cycle Time
1C32:03 Shift time Time between SYNC0 event and output of the outputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:04 Sync modes Supported synchronization modes: UINT16 RO 0xC007
supported (49159dec)
• Bit 0 = 1: free run is supported
• Bit 1 = 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event is supported
• Bit 2-3 = 01: DC mode is supported
• Bit 4-5 = 10: Output Shift with SYNC1 event (only
DC mode)
• Bit 14 = 1: dynamic times (measurement through
writing of 0x1C32:08)
1C32:05 Minimum cycle time Minimum cycle time (in ns) UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C32:06 Calc and copy time Minimum time between SYNC0 and SYNC1 event (in UINT32 RO 0x00000000
ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:07 Minimum delay time UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C32:08 Command • 0: Measurement of the local cycle time is stopped UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
• 1: Measurement of the local cycle time is started
The entries 0x1C32:03, 0x1C32:05, 0x1C32:06,
0x1C32:09, 0x1C33:03 [} 182], 0x1C33:06 [} 181],
0x1C33:09 [} 182] are updated with the maximum
measured values.
For a subsequent measurement the measured values
are reset
1C32:09 Maximum Delay time Time between SYNC1 event and output of the outputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:0B SM event missed Number of missed SM events in OPERATIONAL (DC UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter mode only)
1C32:0C Cycle exceeded Number of occasions the cycle time was exceeded in UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter OPERATIONAL (cycle was not completed in time or
the next cycle began too early)
1C32:0D Shift too short counter Number of occasions that the interval between SYNC0 UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
and SYNC1 event was too short (DC mode only)
1C32:20 Sync error The synchronization was not correct in the last cycle BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
(outputs were output too late; DC mode only)

EL252x Version: 4.3 181


Commissioning

Index 0x1C33 SM input parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C33:0 SM input parameter Synchronization parameters for the inputs UINT8 RO 0x20 (32dec)
1C33:01 Sync mode Current synchronization mode: UINT16 RW 0x0022 (34dec)
• 0: Free Run
• 1: Synchron with SM 3 Event (no outputs
available)
• 2: DC - Synchron with SYNC0 Event
• 3: DC - Synchron with SYNC1 Event
• 34: Synchron with SM 2 Event (outputs available)
1C33:02 Cycle time as 0x1C32:02 [} 181] UINT32 RW 0x001E8480
(2000000dec)
1C33:03 Shift time Time between SYNC0 event and reading of the inputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:04 Sync modes Supported synchronization modes: UINT16 RO 0xC007
supported (49159dec)
• Bit 0: free run is supported
• Bit 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event is supported
(outputs available)
• Bit 1: Synchron with SM 3 Event is supported (no
outputs available)
• Bit 2-3 = 01: DC mode is supported
• Bit 4-5 = 01: Input Shift through local event
(outputs available)
• Bit 4-5 = 10: Input Shift with SYNC1 Event (no
outputs available)
• Bit 14 = 1: dynamic times (measurement through
writing of 0x1C32:08 [} 181] or 0x1C33:08)
1C33:05 Minimum cycle time as 0x1C32:05 [} 181] UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C33:06 Calc and copy time Time between reading of the inputs and availability of UINT32 RO 0x00000000
the inputs for the master (in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:07 Minimum delay time UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C33:08 Command as 0x1C32:08 [} 181] UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
1C33:09 Maximum Delay time Time between SYNC1 event and reading of the inputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:0B SM event missed as 0x1C32:11 [} 181] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter
1C33:0C Cycle exceeded as 0x1C32:12 [} 181] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter
1C33:0D Shift too short counter as 0x1C32:13 [} 181] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
1C33:20 Sync error as 0x1C32:32 [} 181] BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)

Profile-specific objects (0x6000-0xFFFF)


The profile-specific objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves that support the profile 5001.

182 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x6000 PTO Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6000:0 PTO Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x10 (16dec)
6000:01 Sel. Ack/End counter Confirms the change of the base frequency with BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
activated travel distance control:
target counter value reached
6000:02 Ramp active Ramp is currently being followed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6000:07 Error General error bit, is set together with overrange and BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
underrange
6000:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for Distributed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
Clocks mode. It indicates whether a synchronization
error has occurred during the previous cycle.
6000:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO Toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.

Index 0x6010 ENC Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6010:0 ENC Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x12 (18dec)
6010:02 Latch extern valid The counter value was locked by the external latch BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
input.
The data with index 0x6010:12 match the latched value
when the bit is set. To reactivate the latch input, index
0x7010:02 [} 184] or object index 0x7010:04 [} 184]
must be canceled and then reset.
6010:03 Set counter done Counter was set. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6010:04 Counter underflow This bit is set if the 16-bit counter underflows (0 -> BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
65535).
It is reset when the counter drops below two thirds of
its measuring range (43690 -> 43689) or immediately
an overflow occurs.
6010:05 Counter overflow This bit is set if the 16-bit counter overflows (65535 -> BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0).
It is reset when the counter exceeds one third of its
measuring range (21845 -> 21846) or immediately an
underflow occurs.
6010:0D Status of extern latch The status of the latch input BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6010:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for Distributed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
Clocks mode. It indicates whether a synchronization
error has occurred during the previous cycle.
6010:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO Toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.
6010:11 Counter value Counter value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
6010:12 Latch value Latch value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0x6020 PLS Inputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6020:0 PLS Inputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x10 (16dec)
6020:01 PLS Enabled Automatic counting function activated BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6020:04 Status of output Status of the output BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6020:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for Distributed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
Clocks mode. It indicates whether a synchronization
error has occurred during the previous cycle.
6020:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO Toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.

EL252x Version: 4.3 183


Commissioning

Index 0x7000 PTO Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7000:0 PTO Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x12 (18dec)
7000:01 Frequency select Fast toggling of the base frequency (only if ramp BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
function is deactivated)
0bin = base frequency 1 (object 0x8000:12 [} 173])
1bin = base frequency 2 (object 0x8000:13 [} 173])
7000:02 Disable ramp The ramp function is disabled despite active object BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8000:06 [} 173]; if the travel distance control is
active, it is aborted by this bit.
7000:03 Go counter If travel distance control is activated (object 0x8000:0A BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
[} 173]), a specified counter value is driven to if the bit
is set
7000:11 Frequency value Frequency value UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
7000:12 Target counter value Target counter value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0x7010 ENC Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7010:0 ENC Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x11 (17dec)
7010:02 Enable latch extern Activate external latch with positive edge. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
on positive edge
7010:03 Set counter Set counter value BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7010:04 Enable latch extern Activate external latch with negative edge. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
on negative edge
7010:11 Set counter value This is the counter value to be set via "Set counter" UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(index 0x7010:03 [} 184]). (0dec)

Index 0x7020 PLS Outputs


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7020:0 PLS Outputs Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x12 (18dec)
7020:01 Enable PLS Activate automatic counting function BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7020:04 Output Signal at the output BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7020:11 Switch-on value Counter value at which the 24 V output is switched on UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
7020:12 Switch-off value Counter value at which the 24 V output is switched off UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0xF000 Modular device profile


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F000:0 Modular device profile General information for the modular device profile UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
F000:01 Module index Index distance of the objects of the individual channels UINT16 RO 0x0010 (16dec)
distance
F000:02 Maximum number of Number of channels UINT16 RO 0x0003 (3dec)
modules

Index 0xF008 Code word


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F008:0 Code word currently reserved UINT32 RW 0x00000000
(0dec)

184 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0xF010 Module list


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F010:0 Module list Max. Subindex UINT8 RW 0x03 (3dec)
F010:01 SubIndex 001 Reserved UINT32 RW 0x000000FD
(253dec)
F010:02 SubIndex 002 reserved UINT32 RW 0x000001FF
(511dec)
F010:03 SubIndex 003 reserved UINT32 RW 0x00000200
(512dec)

EL252x Version: 4.3 185


Commissioning

6.6 EL2522

6.6.1 Basic function principles

Operating modes of the EL2522

In addition to the "enhanced operating mode" known from the EL2521, the EL2522 also supports an
"enhanced operating mode with continuous position specification" and an "enhanced operating mode with
continuous position specification and arrival time".
As an extension to the EL2521, the EL2522 offers the "enhanced operating mode" in single-channel or single
operating mode with A-, B- and C-track (zero track / reference) or in 2-channel or double operating mode,
each with A- and B-track.
Version PDO settings Comments FW/HW ESI Process data CoE pa-
[} 223] rameters
Legacy formerly MDP 252 not available for the - - - -
EL2522
enhanced operating 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit 1 Ch.: with C-track from 02 from EL2522-0000 PDO Feature
mode (MDP 253/511) -0000 Assignment bits and
settings
2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit Inputs: 0x1A00,
in CoE
(MDP 253/511) 0x1A02
objects
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit Outputs: 0x1600, (hex)
(MDP 253/511) 0x1602, 0x160A 8000,
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit 8010,
(MDP 253/511) 8020 and
8030
enhanced operating 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit 1 Ch.: with C-track; from 02 from EL2522-0000 PDO
mode with continuous (MDP 253/511), path without ramp, Assignment
position specification continues position DC-Synchronous must
Inputs: 0x1A03
be selected
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit Outputs:
(MDP 253/511), 0x160B, 0x1601
continues position
enhanced operating 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit 1 Ch.: with C-track; from 02 from EL2522-0000 PDO
mode with continuous (MDP 253/511), path without ramp, Assignment
position specification continues position, with specification of arrival
Inputs: 0x1A03
and arrival time arrival time time possible (target
Outputs:
time); DC-
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit 0x160B, 0x1601,
Synchronous must be
(MDP 253/511), 0x1604
selected
continues position, with
arrival time

Output modes of the EL2522

The EL2522 has three different output modes. A choice can be made via index 0x8000 [} 201]:0E for
incremental encoder 1 or index 0x8010 [} 203]:0E for incremental encoder 2 between the output modes:
• "Frequency modulation (value: 0)",
• "Pulse direction specification (value: 1)" and
• "Incremental encoder (value: 2)".

In addition, the EL2522 operates cycle-synchronously when using the "continuous position" PDO presets
and thus generates pinpoint output control clock signals synchronously with the task cycle.

With the additional selection "continuous position w. arrival time", a target time in which a target position is to
be reached is specified instead of a frequency. The clock signals are also output cycle-synchronously in this
case, too, as long as this specification is within the plausible range.

186 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Output modes Meaning Index


0x8000
[} 201]:0E
value
Frequency Only one channel is active per direction, on 0
modulation which a frequency-modulated signal is output.
The clockwise direction is realized via channel
A, the counter clockwise direction via channel
B.

Pulse The direction is controlled by channel B. The 1


direction clockwise direction is represented by a low
setting level and the counter clockwise direction by a
high level. The actual signal, conversely, is
output in modulated form via channel A.

Incremental The direction is defined by the shifting of 2


encoder channels A and B. If channel A leads by 90°,
this indicates a "forward" movement. If
channel B leads by 90°, this indicates a
"reverse" movement.
In the 1-channel variant the C-track (zero
track) can additionally be output.

Process data monitoring


• WcState: if ≠ 0, this EtherCAT device does not take part in the process data traffic
• State: if ≠ 8, the EtherCAT device is not in OP (operational) status
• TxPDO state, SyncError: if ≠ 0, then no valid process data are available, e.g. caused by broken
wire
• TxPDO Toggle: If this bit toggles, a new set of process data is available

Delivery state

Independent of the hardware/firmware version, an EL2522 newly integrated in the system registers itself in
the operating mode "2-channel standard 32-bit (MDP 253/511)".

Enhanced operating mode: Incremental encoder simulation

The "enhanced operating mode (253/511)" is the enhanced operating mode familiar from the EL2521.
Please refer to the corresponding chapter of the EL2521 (see also chapter EL2521 function [} 137]) for an
explanation of the functionality and the steps necessary for commissioning.

Unlike the EL2521, it is possible to choose between a 1-channel and a 2-channel operating mode (single or
double operation).
• In 1-channel operating mode a C-track is output in addition to the A- and B-tracks.
• In 2-channel operating mode two outputs are offered per channel, each with an A- and a B-track. Both
behave in the same way as the known 1-channel operating mode.

EL252x Version: 4.3 187


Commissioning

Enhanced operating mode: Incremental encoder simulation with continuous position specification.

In the operating modes 1-channel standard 32-bit, continuous position, and 2-channel standard 32-bit,
continuous position, the EL2522 can simulate an incremental encoder with A-, B- and C-tracks (1-channel or
single operating mode) or two independent incremental encoders (2-channel or double operating mode),
each with an A- and a B-track. As previously with the EL2521 there is also a choice here between the output
modes incremental encoder, frequency modulation or pulse direction control.

Basically, the clock signals are output here cycle-synchronously (necessary selection in the EL2522 DC
settings: DC-synchronous).

After selection of the respective PDO assignment, the associated process data are represented in
accordance with the following illustration.

Fig. 168: Representation of the process data according to the PDO selection "1-channel standard 32-bit,
continuous position" in the TwinCAT System Manager.

The output value "Target counter value" is written with the desired target position for the next cycle.
Depending on the current position (input value "Counter Value"), the EL2522 calculates the frequency
necessary for reaching the desired position in the next cycle. A fixed running direction can be specified by
the output bits "Forward" and "Reverse". If the "Automatic direction" bit is set, the terminal selects the
running direction depending on the position difference (actual and target value) in favor of the shorter
distance.

If 2-channel mode is in use, the process data for the second incremental encoder are added analogously to
those for the first.

188 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Enhanced operating mode: Incremental encoder simulation with continuous position specification and
arrival time

In addition to the functions mentioned above, it is possible in the operating mode "continuous position
specification and arrival time" to define when the target position should be reached. Consequently, the
calculation no longer takes place with the specification of the target position to be reached in the next cycle,
but taking into account an arrival time specified by the user instead.

Fig. 169: Representation of the process data according to the PDO selection "1-channel standard 32-bit,
continuous position w. arrival time" in the TwinCAT System Manager.

The desired target time for reaching the target position can be specified by the output value "Target Arrival
Time". The frequency is then calculated accordingly. If the calculated frequency should be higher than the
set maximum frequency ("Base Frequency 1": incremental encoder 1: index 0x8000 [} 201]:12 or incremental
encoder 2: index 0x8010 [} 203]:12), then the frequency is limited to this value and the target position is
accordingly reached at a later time.

Use of micro-increments
When using micro-increments, care must be taken that the internal 100 MHz is not exceeded.
Example:
-cycle time 1 ms
– 15-bit micro-increments.
If three "genuine" increments should be output in a cycle, that is already
(3 x 2^15) / 1 ms = approx. 98 MHz.

EL252x Version: 4.3 189


Commissioning

Setting the counter value / zero calibration (A/B adaptation)


The counter value can be manually set. To do this, the desired counter value must be entered in the
index 0x7020 [} 218]:11 (Set counter Value). If index 0x7020 [} 218]:03 (Set Counter) is now set,
the counter value is adopted. At the same time, the parameters for the running direction must be set
to FALSE (Automatic Direction, Forward, Backward, 0x7000 [} 218]:04 – 0x7000 [} 218]:06). If the
counter value is set to "0", the C-track goes into the "high" state.
The behavior of channels A and B in this case can be defined by index 0x80x0:01 "Adapt A/B on
position set".
• By default the value is FALSE.
The position of the C-track relative to A and B is then not changed.
• If the value is set to TRUE ,channels A and B are both set to high. Consequently, a change of
state occurs on both channels!

Function: automatic adoption of the target value

In the enhanced operating modes "continuous position specification" and "continuous position specification
with arrival time" a threshold value (object 0x8020 [} 204]:1A for incremental encoder 1, object 0x8030
[} 204]:1A for incremental encoder 2) can be specified for the automatic adoption of setpoints. If the
difference between the setpoint and the actual value exceeds this preset threshold value, the actual value
will be overwritten with the setpoint on the next Sync; i.e. the value of the target counter is directly adopted
as the counter value WITHOUT incremental encoder clock signals being output.

→ The following steps must be performed in order to use this function.

1. Activate "DC-Synchronous"
2. Activate PDOs 0x1A03 [} 212] (Input) and 0x1603 [} 208] (Output)
3. Set the threshold value

Fig. 170: Threshold setting in object 0x8020:1A [} 204] for incremental encoder 1

Example:
• 0x8020:1A = "Autoset treshold" = 0x00000100
◦ (→ the value is >=1: Autoset Threshold, "Automatic setting" is activated)
• Cycle n (setting the target counter value):
◦ "Target counter value" = 0x00000200
◦ "Counter value" = 0x00000000

→ threshold for automatic setting is exceeded; NO clock signals will be output at the output of the terminal.
• The "Target counter Value" is directly adopted into the "Counter value".

190 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

◦ "Target counter value" = 0x00000200


◦ "Counter value" = 0x00000200
• Cycle n+1 (resetting the target counter value):
◦ "Target counter value" = 0x00000220
◦ "Counter value" = 0x00000200

The threshold (0x00000100) is NOT overwritten with the difference between target counter value and current
counter value (in this case the value: 0x20) for automatic setting. Therefore clock signals are output at the
output of the terminal until the target counter value is reached.
• Cycle n+2 (continuation in this operation mode with further target counter values):
◦ "Target counter value" = 0x????????
◦ "Counter value" = 0x00000220

This function accordingly enables the counter value to be set directly as an alternative to using the object
0x7020:03 (or 0x7030:03) "Set counter".

It is recommended to use the function of the automatic adoption of the setpoint only in special
exceptional cases!

Initialization
The actual value is initialized during the transition from SafeOp to Op. The current setpoint is
adopted here as the actual value.

Exceeding the maximum frequency


If the set maximum frequency is exceeded when calculating the necessary frequency for reaching
the target position within the foreseen period, the maximum frequency is adopted. This leads to
"extended" travel distances and should be taken into account and if necessary checked accordingly.
The maximum frequency can be set via index 0x8010:12 / 0x8020 [} 204]:12 (Base Frequency 1).

6.6.2 Process Data


The process data selection in the System Manager specifies the operation mode of the EL2522.

The process data are entered individually by hand or as "Predefined PDO Assignment" via the "Process
Data" tab.

When selecting the EL2522 in the System Manager, the appropriate operation mode can be selected in
accordance with the table above by clicking on the "Process Data" tab and selecting the predefined PDO
assignments.

Fig. 171: "Predefined PDO-Assignment" – excerpt from the TwinCAT System Manager on the "Process
Data" tab of the EL2522

Eight process data sets are available for the EL2522 and are listed in following table on the basis of the CoE
objects used.

EL252x Version: 4.3 191


Commissioning

Sync Manager (SM)

PDO assignment of the SyncManager


SM1, PDO Assignment 0x1C13, inputs
Index assigned to PDO setting Index of excluded Size Name PDO Content
PDOs (byte.bit) Index - Name
0x1A00 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1A01, 0x1A03, 2.0 PTO Status Ch. 1 0x6000:01 - Sel. Ack/End counter
253/511) 0x1A04, 0x1A05 0x6000:02 - Ramp active
0x6000:07 - Error
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP
0x6000:0E - Sync error
253/511)
0x6000:10 - TxPDO Toggle
2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1A03, 0x1A05
253/511)
0x1A01 2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 2.0 PTO Status Ch. 2
253/511)
0x1A02 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1A01, 0x1A03, 4.0 ENC Status compact 0x6020:03 - Set counter done
253/511) 0x1A04, 0x1A05 Ch. 1 0x6020:04 - Counter underflow
2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1A03, 0x1A05 0x6020:05 - Counter overflow
253/511) 0x6020:0E - Sync error
0x6020:0F - TxPDO State
0x1A03 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1A01, 0x1A02, 6.0 ENC Status Ch. 1 0x6020:10 - TxPDO Toggle
253/511) 0x1A04, 0x1A05 0x6020:11 - Counter value
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1A00, 0x1A01,
253/511), continues position 0x1A02, 0x1A04,
0x1A05
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP
253/511), continues position
w. arrival time
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1A00, 0x1A01,
253/511), continuous 0x1A02, 0x1A04
position
0x1A04 2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1A03, 0x1A05 4.0 ENC Status compact
253/511) Ch. 2
0x1A05 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1A02, 0x1A04 6.0 ENC Status Ch. 2
253/511)
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1A00, 0x1A01,
253/511), continuous 0x1A02, 0x1A04
position
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP
253/511), continuous
position w. arrival time

192 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

SM2, PDO assignment 0x1C12, outputs


Index assigned to PDO setting Index of excluded Size Name PDO Content
PDOs (byte.bit) Index - Name
0x1600 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603, 4.0 PTO Control Ch. 1 0x7000:01 - Frequency select
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1605, 0x7000:02 - Disable ramp
0x1606, 0x1607, 0x7000:03 - Go counter
0x1608, 0x1609, 0x7000:11 - Frequency value
0x160B, 0x160C,
0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160B, 0x160D
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1605,
0x1606, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C,
0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1607, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x1601 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602, 6.0 PTO Control Position 0x7000:04 - Automatic direction
253/511), continues position 0x1604, 0x1605, Ch. 1 0x7000:05 - Forward
0x1606, 0x1607, 0x7000:06 - Backward
0x1608, 0x1609, 0x7000:12 - Target counter value
0x160A, 0x160C,
0x160D
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1605, 0x1606,
w. arrival time 0x1607, 0x1608,
0x1609, 0x160A,
0x160C, 0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
w. arrival time 0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x1602 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603, 2.0 PTO Target compact 0x7000:12 - Target counter value
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1605, Ch. 1
0x1606, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160B, 0x160C,
0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160B, 0x160D
0x1603 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602, 4.0 PTO Target Ch. 1 0x7000:12 - Target counter value
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1605,
0x1606, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C,
0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1607, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C

EL252x Version: 4.3 193


Commissioning

SM2, PDO assignment 0x1C12, outputs


Index assigned to PDO setting Index of excluded Size Name PDO Content
PDOs (byte.bit) Index - Name
0x1604 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602, 8.0 PTO Arrival Ch. 1 0x7000:13 - Target arrival time
253/511), continues position 0x1605, 0x1606,
w. arrival time 0x1607, 0x1608,
0x1609, 0x160A,
0x160C, 0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
w. arrival time 0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x1605 2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603, 4.0 PTO Control Ch. 2 0x7010:01 - Frequency select
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606, 0x7010:02 - Disable ramp
0x1608, 0x1609, 0x7010:03 - Go counter
0x160B, 0x160D 0x7010:11 - Frequency value
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1607, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x1606 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602, 6.0 PTO Control Position 0x7010:04 - Automatic direction
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604, Ch. 2 0x7010:05 - Forward
0x1605, 0x1607, 0x7010:06 - Backward
0x1608, 0x1609, 0x7010:12 - Target counter value
0x160A, 0x160C
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
w. arrival time 0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x1607 2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603, 2.0 PTO Target compact 0x7010:12 - Target counter value
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606, Ch. 2
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160B, 0x160D
0x1608 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602, 4.0 PTO Target Ch. 2 0x7010:12 - Target counter value
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1607, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x1609 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602, 8.0 PTO Arrival Ch. 2 0x7010:13 - Target arrival time
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
w. arrival time 0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x160A 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603, 4.0 ENC Control compact 0x7020:03 - Set counter
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1605, Ch. 1 (0x7020:10 - Reserved)
0x1606, 0x1607, 0x7020:11 - Set counter value
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160B, 0x160C,
0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160B, 0x160D

194 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

SM2, PDO assignment 0x1C12, outputs


Index assigned to PDO setting Index of excluded Size Name PDO Content
PDOs (byte.bit) Index - Name
0x160B 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602, 6.0 ENC Control Ch. 1 0x7020:03 - Set counter
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1605, (0x7020:10 - Reserved)
0x1606, 0x1607, 0x7020:11 - Set counter value
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C,
0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602,
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606,
0x1607, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1604, 0x1605,
0x1606, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C,
0x160D
1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1605, 0x1606,
w. arrival time 0x1607, 0x1608,
0x1609, 0x160A,
0x160C, 0x160D
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
w. arrival time 0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
0x160C 2 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1603, 4.0 ENC Control compact 0x7030:03 - Set counter
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606, Ch. 2 (0x7030:10 - Reserved)
0x1608, 0x1609, 0x7030:11 - Set counter value
0x160B, 0x160D
0x160D 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1601, 0x1602, 6.0 ENC Control Ch. 2 0x7030:03 - Set counter
253/511) 0x1604, 0x1606, (0x7030:10 - Reserved)
0x1607, 0x1609, 0x7030:11 - Set counter value
0x160A, 0x160C
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C
2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 0x1600, 0x1602,
253/511), continues position 0x1603, 0x1604,
w. arrival time 0x1605, 0x1607,
0x1608, 0x1609,
0x160A, 0x160C

EL252x Version: 4.3 195


Commissioning

Process data setting options

The extent of process data can be set via the Process Data tab as described below (2-level incremental
encoder settings are presented only):

PDO setting: 1 Ch. Standard 16 Bit (MDP 253/511)


• preset standard configuration in TwinCAT 2.11, TwinCAT 3
• so-called compact process image since it has only 16-bit-wide variables
• allows linking to NC axes according to MDP 253, subprofile 511
• C-track within output mode incremental encoder

Fig. 172: Process data and PDO-assignment: “Standard 16 Bit (MDP 253/511)”

196 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

PDO setting: 1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511), continues position


• 32-bit-wide variables
• allows linking to NC axes according to MDP 253, subprofile 511
• continuous positioning / output cycles cycle-synchronous
• Additional output of C-track with incremental encoder output mode (single mode only)

Fig. 173: Process data and PDO assignment: “1 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511), continues position”

EL252x Version: 4.3 197


Commissioning

PDO setting: 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511), continues position


• 32-bit-wide variables
• allows linking to NC axes according to MDP 253, subprofile 511
• continuous positioning / output pulses cycle-synchronously
• double operation mode

Fig. 174: Process data and PDO-assignment: “2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511), continues position”

198 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

PDO setting: 2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511), continues position w. arrival time
• 32-bit-wide variables
• allows linking to NC axes according to MDP 253, subprofile 511
• continuous positioning / output pulses cycle-synchronously
• specification of arrival time
• double operation mode

Fig. 175: Process data and PDO-assignment: “2 Ch. Standard 32 Bit (MDP 253/511), continues position w.
arrival time”

EL252x Version: 4.3 199


Commissioning

6.6.3 Object description and parameterization


EtherCAT XML Device Description
The display matches that of the CoE objects from the EtherCAT XML Device Description. We
recommend downloading the latest XML file from the download area of the Beckhoff website and
installing it according to installation instructions.

Parameterization via the CoE list (CAN over EtherCAT)


The terminal is parameterized via the CoE - Online tab (double-click on the respective object) or via
the Process Data tab (allocation of PDOs). Please note the following general CoE information [} 25]
when using/manipulating the CoE parameters:
• Keep a startup list if components have to be replaced
• Differentiation between online/offline dictionary, existence of current XML description
• “CoE-Reload” for resetting the changes

Introduction

The CoE overview contains objects for different intended applications:


• Objects required for parameterization [} 201] during commissioning
• Objects intended for regular operation [} 219], e.g. through ADS access
• Objects for indicating internal settings [} 205] (may be fixed)

The following section first describes the objects required for normal operation, followed by a complete
overview of missing objects.

200 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.6.3.1 Objects for commissioning

Index 0x8000 PTO Settings Ch.1


Index Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
(hex)
8000:0 PTO Max. subindex UINT8 RO 0x18 (24dec)
Settings
Ch.1
8000:01 Adapt A/B If the counter value is set to "0", the C-track goes into BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
on position the "high" state.
set The behavior of channels A and B can be defined in this
case.
• By default the value is FALSE; the position of the
C-track relative to A and B is then not changed.
• If the value is set to TRUE, channels A and B are
both set to high. Consequently, a change of state
occurs on both channels!
8000:02 Emergency TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
ramp active If the watchdog timer responds, the terminal ramps with
the time constant set in object 0x8ppx:18 to the value
set in object 0x8ppx:11.
FALSE
The function is deactivated
8000:03 Watchdog TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
timer The watchdog timer is deactivated
deactive
FALSE
The watchdog timer is activated in the delivery state.
Either the manufacturer's of the user's switch-on value
is output if the watchdog overflows.
8000:04 Sign/amount TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
representati The output value is displayed in magnitude-sign format:
on -2dec = 0x8002
-1dec = 0x8001
1dec = 0x0001
2dec = 0x0002
FALSE
The output value is output as a signed integer in two's
complement:
-2dec = 0xFFFE
-1dec = 0xFFFF
1dec = 0x0001
2dec = 0x0002
8000:06 Ramp TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x01 (1dec)
function Ramp function activated
active
FALSE
Ramp function deactivated
8000:07 Ramp base permitted values: BIT1 RW 0x00 (0dec)
frequency 0 10 Hz
1 1 kHz
8000:08 Direct input TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
mode Direct input mode
FALSE
Relative input mode
8000:09 Users TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
switch-on- Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: User's switch-
value on wdt on value
FALSE
Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: Manufacturer's
switch-on value
8000:0A Travel TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
distance Travel distance control activated
control
FALSE
active
Travel distance control deactivated

EL252x Version: 4.3 201


Commissioning

Index Name Meaning Data type Flags Default


(hex)
8000:0E Operating permitted values: BIT2 RW 0x00 (0dec)
mode 0 Frequency mod.
1 Pulse-dir. ctrl
2 Incremental enc.
8000:10 Negative TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
logic Negative logic
FALSE
Positive logic
8000:11 Users User switch-on value (frequency) UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
switch-on-
value
8000:12 Base Base frequency 1 = 50000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x0000C350 (50000dec)
frequency 1
8000:13 Base Base frequency 2 = 100000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x000186A0
frequency 2 (100000dec)
8000:14 Ramp time Ramp time constant (rising) UINT16 RW 0x03E8 (1000dec)
constant
(rising)
8000:15 Ramp time Ramp time constant (falling) UINT16 RW 0x03E8 (1000dec)
constant
(falling)
8000:16 Frequency Frequency factor (direct input, digit x 10 mHz) UINT16 RW 0x0064 (100dec)
factor (Digit
x 10mHz)
8000:17 Slowing Slowing down frequency, travel distance control UINT16 RW 0x0032 (50dec)
down
frequency
8000:18 Ramp time Ramp time constant for controlled switch-off; user's UINT16 RW 0x03E8 (1000dec)
constant switch-on value is driven to (object 0x8pp0:11)
(emergency)

202 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x8010 PTO Settings Ch.2


Index Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
(hex)
8010:0 PTO Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x18 (24dec)
Settings
Ch.2
8010:01 Adapt A/B If the counter value is set to "0", the C-track goes into the "high" BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
on position state.
set The behavior of channels A and B can be defined in this case.
• By default the value is FALSE.
The position of the C-track relative to A and B is then not
changed.
• If the value is set to TRUE, channels A and B are both set to
high. Consequently, a change of state occurs on both
channels!
8010:02 Emergency TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
ramp active If the watchdog timer responds, the terminal ramps with the time
constant set in object 0x8ppx:18 to the value set in object
0x8ppx:11.
FALSE
The function is deactivated
8010:03 Watchdog TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
timer The watchdog timer is deactivated
deactive
FALSE
The watchdog timer is activated in the delivery state. Either the
manufacturer's of the user's switch-on value is output if the
watchdog overflows.
8010:04 Sign/amount TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
representati The output value is displayed in magnitude-sign format:
on -2dec = 0x8002
-1dec = 0x8001
1dec = 0x0001
2dec = 0x0002
FALSE
The output value is output as a signed integer in two's complement:
-2dec = 0xFFFE
-1dec = 0xFFFF
1dec = 0x0001
2dec = 0x0002
8010:06 Ramp TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x01 (1dec)
function Ramp function activated
active
FALSE
Ramp function deactivated
8010:07 Ramp base permitted values: BIT1 RW 0x00 (0dec)
frequency 0 10 Hz
1 1 kHz
8010:08 Direct input TRUE Direct input mode FALSE Relative input mode BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
mode
8010:09 Users TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
switch-on- Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: User's switch-on value
value on wdt
FALSE
Behavior with triggered watchdog timer: Manufacturer's switch-on
value
8010:0A Travel TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
distance Travel distance control activated
control
FALSE
active
Travel distance control deactivated

EL252x Version: 4.3 203


Commissioning

Index Name Meaning Data type Flags Default


(hex)
8010:0E Operating permitted values: BIT2 RW 0x00 (0dec)
mode 0 Frequency mod.
1 Pulse-dir. ctrl
2 Incremental enc.
8010:10 Negative TRUE BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
logic Negative logic
FALSE
Positive logic
8010:11 Users User switch-on value (frequency) UINT16 RW 0x0000
switch-on- (0dec)
value
8010:12 Base Base frequency 1 = 50000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x0000C35
frequency 1 0
(50000dec)
8010:13 Base Base frequency 2 = 100000 Hz UINT32 RW 0x000186A
frequency 2 0
(100000dec)
8010:14 Ramp time Ramp time constant (rising) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
constant (1000dec)
(rising)
8010:15 Ramp time Ramp time constant (falling) UINT16 RW 0x03E8
constant (1000dec)
(falling)
8010:16 Frequency Frequency factor (direct input, digit x 10 mHz) UINT16 RW 0x0064
factor (Digit (100dec)
x 10mHz)
8010:17 Slowing Slowing down frequency, travel distance control UINT16 RW 0x0032
down (50dec)
frequency
8010:18 Ramp time Ramp time constant for controlled switch-off; user's switch-on value UINT16 RW 0x03E8
constant is driven to (object 0x8pp0:11) (1000dec)
(emergency)

Index 0x8020 ENC Settings Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8020:0 ENC Settings Ch.1 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x1A (26dec)
8020:01 Enable C reset The counter is reset via the C-track BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
8020:0A Enable micro The counter is more highly resolved with the bits BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
increments specified in 0x8pp0:16
8020:18 Micro increment bits If 0x8pp0:0A is enabled: Number of micro increment UINT16 RW 0x0008 (8dec)
bits
8020:19 Pulses per revolution If C-reset active: Number of increments "per UINT32 RW 0x00000400
revolution". At 1024 the counter counts (1024dec)
8020:1A Autoset threshold If the difference between "Target counter value" and UINT32 RW 0x00000000
"Counter value" exceeds this threshold, no output takes (0dec)
place.
0: function for automatic setting is inactive

Index 0x8030 ENC Settings Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
8030:0 ENC Settings Ch.2 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x1A (26dec)
8030:01 Enable C reset The counter is reset via the C-track. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
8030:0A Enable micro The counter is more highly resolved with the bits BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
increments specified in 0x8pp0:16.
8030:18 Micro increment bits If 0x8pp0:0A is enabled: UINT16 RW 0x0008 (8dec)
Number of micro increment bits
8030:19 Pulses per revolution If C-reset active: UINT32 RW 0x00000400
Number of increments "per revolution". At 1024 the (1024dec)
counter counts
8030:1A Autoset threshold If the difference between "Target counter value" and UINT32 RW 0x00000000
"Counter value" exceeds this threshold, no output takes (0dec)
place.
0: function for automatic setting is inactive

204 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

6.6.3.2 Standard objects (0x1000-0x1FFF)


The standard objects have the same meaning for all EtherCAT slaves.

Index 0x1000 Device type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1000:0 Device type Device type of the EtherCAT slave: The Lo-Word UINT32 RO 0x00001389
contains the CoE profile used (5001). The Hi-Word (5001dec)
contains the module profile according to the modular
device profile.

Index 0x1008 Device name


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1008:0 Device name Device name of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO EL2522

Index 0x1009 Hardware version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1009:0 Hardware version Hardware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 00

Index 0x100A Software version


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
100A:0 Software version Firmware version of the EtherCAT slave STRING RO 06

Index 0x1011 Restore default parameters


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1011:0 Restore default Restore default settings UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
parameters
1011:01 SubIndex 001 If this object is set to "0x64616F6C" in the Set Value UINT32 RW 0x00000000
Dialog, all backup objects are reset to their delivery (0dec)
state.

Index 0x1018 Identity


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1018:0 Identity Information for identifying the slave UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1018:01 Vendor ID Vendor ID of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x00000002
(2dec)
1018:02 Product code Product code of the EtherCAT slave UINT32 RO 0x09DA3052
(165294162dec)
1018:03 Revision Revision number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Word UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(bit 0-15) indicates the special terminal number, the (0dec)
High Word (bit 16-31) refers to the device description
1018:04 Serial number Serial number of the EtherCAT slave; the Low Byte (bit UINT32 RO 0x00000000
0-7) of the Low Word contains the year of production, (0dec)
the High Byte (bit 8-15) of the Low Word contains the
week of production, the High Word (bit 16-31) is 0

Index 0x10F0 Backup parameter handling


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
10F0:0 Backup parameter Information for standardized loading and saving of UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
handling backup entries
10F0:01 Checksum Checksum across all backup entries of the EtherCAT UINT32 RO 0x00000000
slave (0dec)

EL252x Version: 4.3 205


Commissioning

Index 0x1400 PTO RxPDO-Par Control Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1400:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Ch.1
1400:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 04 16 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 1

Index 0x1401 PTO RxPDO-Par Control Position Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1401:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Position Ch.1
1401:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 02 16 03
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 2

Index 0x1402 PTO RxPDO-Par Target compact Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1402:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target compact Ch.1
1402:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 03 16 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 3

Index 0x1403 PTO RxPDO-Par Target Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1403:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 4 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target Ch.1
1403:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 01 16 02 16 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 4

Index 0x1404 PTO RxPDO-Par Arrival Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1404:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Arrival Ch.1
1404:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 00 16 02 16 03
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 5

Index 0x1405 PTO RxPDO-Par Control Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1405:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Ch.2
1405:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 06 16 09 16 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 6

Index 0x1406 PTO RxPDO-Par Control Position Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1406:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 7 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Position Ch.2
1406:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 05 16 07 16 08
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 7

206 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1407 PTO RxPDO-Par Target compact Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1407:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 8 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target compact Ch.2
1407:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 06 16 08 16 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 8

Index 0x1408 PTO RxPDO-Par Target Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1408:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 9 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Target Ch.2
1408:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 06 16 07 16 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 9

Index 0x1409 PTO RxPDO-Par Arrival Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1409:0 PTO RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 10 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Arrival Ch.2
1409:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 05 16 07 16 08
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 16
RxPDO 10

Index 0x140A ENC RxPDO-Par Control compact Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
140A:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 11 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control compact Ch.1
140A:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 0B 16 00 00 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 11

Index 0x140B ENC RxPDO-Par Control Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
140B:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 12 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Ch.1
140B:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 0A 16 00 00 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 12

Index 0x140C ENC RxPDO-Par Control compact Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
140C:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 13 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control compact Ch.2
140C:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 0D 16 00 00 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 13

Index 0x140D ENC RxPDO-Par Control Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
140D:0 ENC RxPDO-Par PDO Parameter RxPDO 14 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Ch.2
140D:06 Exclude RxPDOs Specifies the RxPDOs (index 0x of RxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 0C 16 00 00 00
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[6] 00
RxPDO 14

EL252x Version: 4.3 207


Commissioning

Index 0x1600 PTO RxPDO-Map Control Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1600:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control Ch.1
1600:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:01, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x01 (Frequency select))
1600:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:02, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x02 (Disable ramp))
1600:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:03, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x03 (Go counter))
1600:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (13 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 13
1600:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:11, 16
Ch.1), entry 0x11 (Frequency value))

Index 0x1601 PTO RxPDO-Map Control Position Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1601:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Position Ch.1
1601:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (3 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 3
1601:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:04, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x04 (Automatic direction))
1601:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:05, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x05 (Forward))
1601:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:06, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x06 (Reward))
1601:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (10 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 10
1601:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:12, 32
Ch.1), entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1602 PTO RxPDO-Map Target compact Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1602:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target compact Ch.1
1602:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:12, 16
Ch.1), entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1603 PTO RxPDO-Map Target Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1603:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 4 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target Ch.1
1603:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:12, 32
Ch.1), entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1604 PTO RxPDO-Map Arrival Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1604:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Arrival Ch.1
1604:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7000 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7000:13, 64
Ch.1), entry 0x13 (Target arrival time))

208 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1605 PTO RxPDO-Map Control Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1605:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control Ch.2
1605:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:01, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x01 (Frequency select))
1605:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:02, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x02 (Disable ramp))
1605:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:03, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x03 (Go counter))
1605:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (13 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 13
1605:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:11, 16
Ch.2), entry 0x11 (Frequency value))

Index 0x1606 PTO RxPDO-Map Control Position Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1606:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 7 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Control Position Ch.2
1606:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (3 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 3
1606:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:04, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x04 (Automatic direction))
1606:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:05, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x05 (Forward))
1606:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:06, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x06 (Reward))
1606:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (10 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 10
1606:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:12, 32
Ch.2), entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1607 PTO RxPDO-Map Target compact Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1607:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 8 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target compact Ch.2
1607:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:12, 16
Ch.2), entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1608 PTO RxPDO-Map Target Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1608:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 9 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Target Ch.2
1608:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:12, 32
Ch.2), entry 0x12 (Target counter value))

Index 0x1609 PTO RxPDO-Map Arrival Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1609:0 PTO RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 10 UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
Arrival Ch.2
1609:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7010 (PTO Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7010:13, 64
Ch.2), entry 0x13 (Target arrival time))

EL252x Version: 4.3 209


Commissioning

Index 0x160A ENC RxPDO-Map Control compact Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
160A:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 11 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control compact Ch.1
160A:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
160A:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7020:03, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x03 (Set counter))
160A:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (12 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 12
160A:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7020:10, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x10 (Reserved))
160A:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7020:11, 16
Ch.1), entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x160B ENC RxPDO-Map Control Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
160B:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 12 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control Ch.1
160B:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
160B:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7020:03, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x03 (Set counter))
160B:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (12 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 12
160B:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7020:10, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x10 (Reserved))
160B:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7020 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7020:11, 32
Ch.1), entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x160C ENC RxPDO-Map Control compact Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
160C:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 13 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control compact Ch.2
160C:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
160C:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7030 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7030:03, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x03 (Set counter))
160C:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (12 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 12
160C:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7030 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7030:10, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x10 (Reserved))
160C:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7030 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7030:11, 16
Ch.2), entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x160D ENC RxPDO-Map Control Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
160D:0 ENC RxPDO-Map PDO Mapping RxPDO 14 UINT8 RO 0x05 (5dec)
Control Ch.2
160D:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
160D:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7030 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7030:03, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x03 (Set counter))
160D:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (12 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 12
160D:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7030 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7030:10, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x10 (Reserved))
160D:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x7030 (ENC Outputs UINT32 RO 0x7030:11, 32
Ch.2), entry 0x11 (Set counter value))

Index 0x1802 ENC TxPDO-Par Status compact Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1802:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Status compact Ch.1
1802:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index 0x of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 03 1A
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[2]
TxPDO 3

210 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1803 ENC TxPDO-Par Status Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1803:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 4 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Status Ch.1
1803:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index 0x of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 02 1A
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[2]
TxPDO 4

Index 0x1804 ENC TxPDO-Par Status compact Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1804:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Status compact Ch.2
1804:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index 0x of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 05 1A
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[2]
TxPDO 5

Index 0x1805 ENC TxPDO-Par Status Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1805:0 ENC TxPDO-Par PDO parameter TxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x06 (6dec)
Status Ch.2
1805:06 Exclude TxPDOs Specifies the TxPDOs (index 0x of TxPDO mapping OCTET- RO 04 1A
objects) that must not be transferred together with STRING[2]
TxPDO 6

Index 0x1A00 PTO TxPDO-Map Status Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A00:0 PTO TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 1 UINT8 RO 0x0A (10dec)
Status Ch.1
1A00:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO inputs UINT32 RO 0x6000:01, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x01 (Sel. Ack/End counter))
1A00:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6000:02, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x02 (Ramp active))
1A00:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1A00:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6000:07, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x07 (Error))
1A00:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (6 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 6
1A00:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6000:0E, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x0E (Sync error))
1A00:07 SubIndex 0x007 7. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A00:08 SubIndex 0x008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6000:10, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x10 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A00:09 SubIndex 0x009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6000 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6000:11, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x11 ())
1A00:0A SubIndex 0x010 10. PDO Mapping entry (15 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 15

EL252x Version: 4.3 211


Commissioning

Index 0x1A01 PTO TxPDO-Map Status Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A01:0 PTO TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 2 UINT8 RO 0x0A (10dec)
Status Ch.2
1A01:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6010:01, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x01 (Sel. Ack/End counter))
1A01:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6010:02, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x02 (Ramp active))
1A01:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (4 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 4
1A01:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6010:07, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x07 (Error))
1A01:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (6 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 6
1A01:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6010:0E, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x0E (Sync error))
1A01:07 SubIndex 0x007 7. PDO Mapping entry (1 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 1
1A01:08 SubIndex 0x008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6010:10, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x10 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A01:09 SubIndex 0x009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6010 (PTO Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6010:11, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x11 ())
1A01:0A SubIndex 0x010 10. PDO Mapping entry (15 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 15

Index 0x1A02 ENC TxPDO-Map Status compact Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A02:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 3 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status compact Ch.1
1A02:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A02:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:03, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A02:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:04, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A02:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:05, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A02:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1A02:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:0E, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x0E (Sync error))
1A02:07 SubIndex 0x007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:0F, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x0F (TxPDO State))
1A02:08 SubIndex 0x008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:10, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x10 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A02:09 SubIndex 0x009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:11, 16
Ch.1), entry 0x11 (Counter value))

Index 0x1A03 ENC TxPDO-Map Status Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A03:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 4 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status Ch.1
1A03:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A03:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:03, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A03:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:04, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A03:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:05, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A03:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1A03:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:0E, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x0E (Sync error))
1A03:07 SubIndex 0x007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:0F, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x0F (TxPDO State))
1A03:08 SubIndex 0x008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:10, 1
Ch.1), entry 0x10 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A03:09 SubIndex 0x009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6020 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6020:11, 32
Ch.1), entry 0x11 (Counter value))

212 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1A04 ENC TxPDO-Map Status compact Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A04:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 5 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status compact Ch.2
1A04:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A04:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:03, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A04:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:04, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A04:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:05, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A04:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1A04:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:0E, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x0E (Sync error))
1A04:07 SubIndex 0x007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:0F, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x0F (TxPDO State))
1A04:08 SubIndex 0x008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:10, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x10 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A04:09 SubIndex 0x009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:11, 16
Ch.2), entry 0x11 (Counter value))

Index 0x1A05 ENC TxPDO-Map Status Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1A05:0 ENC TxPDO-Map PDO Mapping TxPDO 6 UINT8 RO 0x09 (9dec)
Status Ch.2
1A05:01 SubIndex 0x001 1. PDO Mapping entry (2 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 2
1A05:02 SubIndex 0x002 2. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:03, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x03 (Set counter done))
1A05:03 SubIndex 0x003 3. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:04, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x04 (Counter underflow))
1A05:04 SubIndex 0x004 4. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:05, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x05 (Counter overflow))
1A05:05 SubIndex 0x005 5. PDO Mapping entry (8 bits align) UINT32 RO 0x0000:00, 8
1A05:06 SubIndex 0x006 6. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:0E, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x0E (Sync error))
1A05:07 SubIndex 0x007 7. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:0F, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x0F (TxPDO State))
1A05:08 SubIndex 0x008 8. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:10, 1
Ch.2), entry 0x10 (TxPDO Toggle))
1A05:09 SubIndex 0x009 9. PDO Mapping entry (object 0x6030 (ENC Inputs UINT32 RO 0x6030:11, 32
Ch.2), entry 0x11 (Counter value))

Index 0x1C00 Sync manager type


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C00:0 Sync manager type Using the Sync Managers UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
1C00:01 SubIndex 001 Sync-Manager Type Channel 1: Mailbox Write UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
1C00:02 SubIndex 002 Sync-Manager Type Channel 2: Mailbox Read UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
1C00:03 SubIndex 003 Sync-Manager Type Channel 3: Process Data Write UINT8 RO 0x03 (3dec)
(Outputs)
1C00:04 SubIndex 004 Sync-Manager Type Channel 4: Process Data Read UINT8 RO 0x04 (4dec)
(Inputs)

EL252x Version: 4.3 213


Commissioning

Index 0x1C12 RxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C12:0 RxPDO assign PDO Assign Outputs UINT8 RW 0x06 (6dec)
1C12:01 Subindex 001 1. allocated RxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1600
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5632dec)
1C12:02 Subindex 002 2. allocated RxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1603
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5635dec)
1C12:03 Subindex 003 3. allocated RxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1605
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5637dec)
1C12:04 Subindex 004 4. allocated RxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1608
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5640dec)
1C12:05 Subindex 005 5. allocated RxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x160B
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5643dec)
1C12:06 Subindex 006 6. allocated RxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x160D
associated RxPDO mapping object) (5645dec)

Index 0x1C13 TxPDO assign


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C13:0 TxPDO assign PDO Assign Inputs UINT8 RW 0x04 (4dec)
1C13:01 Subindex 001 1. allocated TxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1A00
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6656dec)
1C13:02 Subindex 002 2. allocated TxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1A01
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6657dec)
1C13:03 Subindex 003 3. allocated TxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1A03
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6659dec)
1C13:04 Subindex 004 4. allocated TxPDO (contains the index 0x of the UINT16 RW 0x1A05
associated TxPDO mapping object) (6661dec)

214 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x1C32 SM output parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C32:0 SM output parameter Synchronization parameters for the outputs UINT8 RO 0x20 (32dec)
1C32:01 Sync mode Current synchronization mode: UINT16 RW 0x0001 (1dec)
• 0: Free Run
• 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event
• 2: DC-Mode - Synchron with SYNC0 Event
• 3: DC-Mode - Synchron with SYNC1 Event
1C32:02 Cycle time Cycle time (in ns): UINT32 RW 0x000F4240
(1000000dec)
• Free Run: Cycle time of the local timer
• Synchron with SM 2 Event: Master cycle time
• DC mode: SYNC0/SYNC1 Cycle Time
1C32:03 Shift time Time between SYNC0 event and output of the outputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:04 Sync modes Supported synchronization modes: UINT16 RO 0x4C07
supported (19463dec)
• Bit 0 = 1: free run is supported
• Bit 1 = 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event is supported
• Bit 2-3 = 01: DC mode is supported
• Bit 4-5 = 10: Output Shift with SYNC1 event (only
DC mode)
• Bit 14 = 1: dynamic times (measurement through
writing of 0x1C32:08)
1C32:05 Minimum cycle time Minimum cycle time (in ns) UINT32 RO 0x000186A0
(100000dec)
1C32:06 Calc and copy time Minimum time between SYNC0 and SYNC1 event (in UINT32 RO 0x00000000
ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:07 Minimum delay time UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C32:08 Command • 0: Measurement of the local cycle time is stopped UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
• 1: Measurement of the local cycle time is started
The entries 0x1C32:03, 0x1C32:05, 0x1C32:06,
0x1C32:09, 0x1C33:03 [} 216], 0x1C33:06 [} 215],
0x1C33:09 [} 216] are updated with the maximum
measured values.
For a subsequent measurement the measured values
are reset
1C32:09 Maximum delay time Time between SYNC1 event and output of the outputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, DC mode only) (0dec)
1C32:0B SM event missed Number of missed SM events in OPERATIONAL (DC UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter mode only)
1C32:0C Cycle exceeded Number of occasions the cycle time was exceeded in UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter OPERATIONAL (cycle was not completed in time or
the next cycle began too early)
1C32:0D Shift too short counter Number of occasions that the interval between SYNC0 UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
and SYNC1 event was too short (DC mode only)
1C32:20 Sync error The synchronization was not correct in the last cycle BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
(outputs were output too late; DC mode only)

EL252x Version: 4.3 215


Commissioning

Index 0x1C33 SM input parameter


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
1C33:0 SM input parameter Synchronization parameters for the inputs UINT8 RO 0x20 (32dec)
1C33:01 Sync mode Current synchronization mode: UINT16 RW 0x0022 (34dec)
• 0: Free Run
• 1: Synchron with SM 3 Event (no outputs
available)
• 2: DC - Synchron with SYNC0 Event
• 3: DC - Synchron with SYNC1 Event
• 34: Synchron with SM 2 Event (outputs available)
1C33:02 Cycle time as 0x1C32:02 [} 215] UINT32 RW 0x000F4240
(1000000dec)
1C33:03 Shift time Time between SYNC0 event and reading of the inputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:04 Sync modes Supported synchronization modes: UINT16 RO 0x4C07
supported (19463dec)
• Bit 0: free run is supported
• Bit 1: Synchron with SM 2 Event is supported
(outputs available)
• Bit 1: Synchron with SM 3 Event is supported (no
outputs available)
• Bit 2-3 = 01: DC mode is supported
• Bit 4-5 = 01: Input Shift through local event
(outputs available)
• Bit 4-5 = 10: Input Shift with SYNC1 Event (no
outputs available)
• Bit 14 = 1: dynamic times (measurement through
writing of 0x1C32:08 [} 215] or 0x1C33:08)
1C33:05 Minimum cycle time as 0x1C32:05 [} 215] UINT32 RO 0x000186A0
(100000dec)
1C33:06 Calc and copy time Time between reading of the inputs and availability of UINT32 RO 0x00000000
the inputs for the master (in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:07 Minimum delay time UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
1C33:08 Command as 0x1C32:08 [} 215] UINT16 RW 0x0000 (0dec)
1C33:09 Maximum delay time Time between SYNC1 event and reading of the inputs UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(in ns, only DC mode) (0dec)
1C33:0B SM event missed as 0x1C32:11 [} 215] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter
1C33:0C Cycle exceeded as 0x1C32:12 [} 215] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
counter
1C33:0D Shift too short counter as 0x1C32:13 [} 215] UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
1C33:20 Sync error as 0x1C32:32 [} 215] BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)

6.6.3.3 Profile-specific objects (0x6000-0xFFFF)

Index 0x6000 PTO Inputs Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6000:0 PTO Inputs Ch.1 UINT8 RO 0x10 (16dec)
6000:01 Sel. Ack/End counter Confirms the change of the base frequency. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
With activated travel distance control:
target counter value reached
6000:02 Ramp active Ramp is currently being followed. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6000:07 Error General error bit, is set together with overrange and BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
underrange
6000:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for DC mode. It BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
indicates whether a synchronization error has occurred
during the previous cycle.
6000:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.

216 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0x6010 PTO Inputs Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6010:0 PTO Inputs Ch.2 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x10 (16dec)
6010:01 Sel. Ack/End counter Confirms the change of the base frequency. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
With activated travel distance control:
target counter value reached
6010:02 Ramp active Ramp is currently being followed BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6010:07 Error General error bit, is set together with overrange and BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
underrange
6010:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for DC mode. It BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
indicates whether a synchronization error has occurred
during the previous cycle.
6010:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.

Index 0x6020 ENC Inputs Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6020:0 ENC Inputs Ch.1 UINT8 RO 0x11 (17dec)
6020:03 Set counter done The counter was set BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6020:04 Counter underflow Counter underflow BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6020:05 Counter overflow Counter overflow. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6020:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for DC mode. It BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
indicates whether a synchronization error has occurred
during the previous cycle.
6020:0F TxPDO State Validity of the data of the associated TxPDO (0 = valid, BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
1 = invalid).
6020:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.
6020:11 Counter value The counter value. UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0x6030 ENC Inputs Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
6030:0 ENC Inputs Ch.2 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x11 (17dec)
6030:03 Set counter done The counter was set BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6030:04 Counter underflow Counter underflow BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6030:05 Counter overflow Counter overflow. BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
6030:0E Sync error The Sync error bit is only required for DC mode. It BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
indicates whether a synchronization error has occurred
during the previous cycle.
6030:0F TxPDO State Validity of the data of the associated TxPDO (0 = valid, BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
1 = invalid).
6030:10 TxPDO Toggle The TxPDO toggle is toggled by the slave when the BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
data of the associated TxPDO is updated.
6030:11 Counter value The counter value. UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

EL252x Version: 4.3 217


Commissioning

Index 0x7000 PTO Outputs Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7000:0 PTO Outputs Ch.1 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x13 (19dec)
7000:01 Frequency select Fast toggling of the base frequency (only if ramp BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
function is deactivated)
0bin = base frequency 1 (object 0x8pp0:12)
1bin = base frequency 2 (object 0x8pp0:13)
7000:02 Disable ramp The ramp function is disabled despite active object BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8pp0:06.
7000:03 Go counter If travel distance control is activated (object BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8pp0:0A), a specified counter value is driven to if the
bit is set
7000:04 Automatic direction The shortest direction is automatically determined BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
7000:05 Forward Manual specification of the output direction. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
("Automatic direction" may not be set)
7000:06 Backward Manual specification of the output direction. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
("Automatic direction" may not be set)
7000:11 Frequency value Output frequency UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
7000:12 Target counter value Target counter value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
7000:13 Target arrival time DC time at which the target counter value should be UINT64 RO
reached

Index 0x7010 PTO Outputs Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7010:0 PTO Outputs Ch.2 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x13 (19dec)
7010:01 Frequency select Fast toggling of the base frequency (only if ramp BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
function is deactivated)
0bin = base frequency 1 (object 0x8pp0:12)
1bin = base frequency 2 (object 0x8pp0:13)
7010:02 Disable ramp The ramp function is disabled despite active index BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8pp0:06.
7010:03 Go counter If travel distance control is activated (object BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
0x8pp0:0A), a specified counter value is driven to if the
bit is set
7010:04 Automatic direction The shortest direction is automatically determined BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
7010:05 Forward Manual specification of the output direction. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
("Automatic direction" may not be set)
7010:06 Backward Manual specification of the output direction. BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (0dec)
("Automatic direction" may not be set)
7010:11 Frequency value Output frequency UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
7010:12 Target counter value Target counter value UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)
7010:13 Target arrival time DC time at which the target counter value should be UINT64 RO
reached

Index 0x7020 ENC Outputs Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7020:0 ENC Outputs Ch.1 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x11 (17dec)
7020:03 Set counter Set the counter value BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7020:10 Reserved BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7020:11 Set counter value This is the counter value to be set by 0x7pp0:03 UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0x7030 ENC Outputs Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
7030:0 ENC Outputs Ch.2 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x11 (17dec)
7030:03 Set counter Set the counter value BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7030:10 Reserved BOOLEAN RO 0x00 (0dec)
7030:11 Set counter value This is the counter value to be set by 0x7pp0:03 UINT32 RO 0x00000000
(0dec)

218 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

Index 0xA000 PTO Diag data Ch.1


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
A000:0 PTO Diag data Ch.1 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
A000:01 Overspeed counter Counts up if the calculated set position does not UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
correspond to the actual position in the next cycle.
Possible causes:
• the output frequency is limited by the
corresponding "Base frequency 1"
• Micro increments are active and the "internal
100 MHz" are exceeded

Index 0xA010 PTO Diag data Ch.2


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
A010:0 PTO Diag data Ch.2 Max. Subindex UINT8 RO 0x01 (1dec)
A010:01 Overspeed counter Counts up if the calculated target position does not UINT16 RO 0x0000 (0dec)
correspond to the actual position in the next cycle.
Possible causes:
• the output frequency is limited by the
corresponding "Base frequency 1"
• Micro increments are active and the "internal
100 MHz" are exceeded

Index 0xF000 Modular device profile


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F000:0 Modular device profile General information for the modular device profile UINT8 RO 0x02 (2dec)
F000:01 Module index Index distance of the objects of the individual channels UINT16 RO 0x0010 (16dec)
distance
F000:02 Maximum number of Number of channels UINT16 RO 0x0004 (4dec)
modules

Index 0xF008 Code word


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F008:0 Code word currently reserved UINT32 RW 0x00000000
(0dec)

Index 0xF010 Module list


Index (hex) Name Meaning Data type Flags Default
F010:0 Module list Max. Subindex UINT8 RW 0x04 (4dec)
F010:01 SubIndex 0x001 Profile number 253 UINT32 RW 0x000000FD
(253dec)
F010:02 SubIndex 0x002 Profile number 253 UINT32 RW 0x000000FD
(253dec)
F010:03 SubIndex 0x003 Profile number 511 UINT32 RW 0x000001FF
(511dec)
F010:04 SubIndex 0x004 Profile number 511 UINT32 RW 0x000001FF
(511dec)

6.6.3.4 Objects for regular operation


In enhanced operating mode the EL2522 has no such objects.

EL252x Version: 4.3 219


Commissioning

6.6.4 Connection of the EL2522 in the NC


Required Firmware (FW) Version and TwinCAT Version
At least FW Version 07 is required for Connection of terminal EL2522 to the NC;
TwinCAT-Versions:
- up to TC 2.11 R3 Build 2250
- up to TC 3.1 Build 4018.16 (recommended)

Procedure

When EL2522 terminal was added to TwinCAT-IO, the procedure is as follows:

1. Select a specific EL2522 operating mode

2. Link the non-referenced axes to the terminal

a)

b)

3. Set distributed clock: "DC-Synchronous" on "DC" tab

4. Set the frequency of the terminal in order to achieve the required velocity.

When using no up to date FW or rather not up dated TwinCAT versions, accordingly to the “Continues
Position” Mode the following should be noticed, if applicable:
• Update the NC driver
• Add axis to the NC

As soon as (between step 2. And 3.):

220 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Commissioning

• Link Axis/Drive/nOutData5 to the "Target Counter Value" of the terminal

a)

b)

• Link Axis/Drive/nCtrl1 to "Automatic Direction" of the terminal

a)

EL252x Version: 4.3 221


Commissioning

b)

c)

222 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

7 Appendix

7.1 Firmware compatibility


Beckhoff EtherCAT devices are delivered with the latest available firmware version. Compatibility of firmware
and hardware is mandatory; not every combination ensures compatibility. The overview below shows the
hardware versions on which a firmware can be operated.

Note
• It is recommended to use the newest possible firmware for the respective hardware.
• Beckhoff is not under any obligation to provide customers with free firmware updates for delivered
products.

NOTE
Risk of damage to the device!
Pay attention to the instructions for firmware updates on the separate page [} 225].
If a device is placed in BOOTSTRAP mode for a firmware update, it does not check when downloading
whether the new firmware is suitable. This can result in damage to the device!
Therefore, always make sure that the firmware is suitable for the hardware version!

EL2521
Hardware (HW) Firmware Revision no. Date of release
02 03 EL2521-0000-0016 2008/08
02 - 05 04 2008/09
05 2008/09
05 - 16* 06 EL2521-0000-0018 2009/01
07 EL2521-0000-0019 2011/01
08 2011/04
09 2011/04
10 2012/04
EL2521-0000-0020 2012/05
EL2521-0000-0021 2012/07
11* 2014/05
EL2521-0000-0022 2014/11

EL2521-0024
Hardware (HW) Firmware Revision no. Date of release
05 - 16* 06 EL2521-0024-1016/17 2009/01
07 EL2521-0024-1018 2011/01
08 2011/04
09 2011/04
10 2012/04
EL2521-0024-1019 2012/05
EL2521-0024-1020 2012/07
11* 2014/05
EL2521-0024-1021 2014/11

EL252x Version: 4.3 223


Appendix

EL2521-0124
Hardware (HW) Firmware Revision no. Date of release
05 - 06 01 EL2521-0124-0016 2009/09
02 2010/03
03 EL2521-0124-0017 2010/06
06 - 16* 04 EL2521-0124-0018 2011/01
05 2011/05
EL2521-0124-0019 2012/05
EL2521-0124-0020 2012/07
06* 2014/06

EL2521-0025
Hardware (HW) Firmware Revision no. Date of release
00 - 08* 06 EL2521-0025-1016/17 2009/12
07 EL2521-0025-1018 2011/01
08 2011/04
09 2011/04
10 2012/04
EL2521-0025-1019 2012/05
EL2521-0025-1020 2012/07
11* 2014/05
EL2521-0025-1021 2014/11

EL2521-1001
Hardware (HW) Firmware Revision no. Date of release
02 03 EL2521-1001-0016 2008/08
02 - 05 04 2008/09
05 2008/09
05 - 13* 06 EL2521-1001-0017 2009/01
07 EL2521-1001-0018 2011/01
08 2011/04
09 2011/04
10 2012/04
EL2521-1001-0019 2012/05
EL2521-1001-0020 2012/07
11* 2014/05

EL2522
Hardware (HW) Firmware Revision no. Date of release
00 - 05* 01 EL2522-0000-0016 2013/12
02 EL2522-0000-0017 2014/08
03 EL2522-0000-0018 2014/09
04 EL2522-0000-0019 2015/01
05 EL2522-0000-0020 2015/01
06 EL2522-0000-0021 2015/01
07* EL2522-0000-0022 2015/07

*) This is the current compatible firmware/hardware version at the time of the preparing this documentation.
Check on the Beckhoff web page whether more up-to-date documentation is available.

224 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

7.2 Firmware Update EL/ES/EM/ELM/EPxxxx


This section describes the device update for Beckhoff EtherCAT slaves from the EL/ES, ELM, EM, EK and
EP series. A firmware update should only be carried out after consultation with Beckhoff support.

NOTE
Only use TwinCAT 3 software!
A firmware update of Beckhoff IO devices must only be performed with a TwinCAT 3 installation. It is
recommended to build as up-to-date as possible, available for free download on the Beckhoff website
https://www.beckhoff.com/en-us/.
To update the firmware, TwinCAT can be operated in the so-called FreeRun mode, a paid license is not
required.
The device to be updated can usually remain in the installation location, but TwinCAT has to be operated in
the FreeRun. Please make sure that EtherCAT communication is trouble-free (no LostFrames etc.).
Other EtherCAT master software, such as the EtherCAT Configurator, should not be used, as they may not
support the complexities of updating firmware, EEPROM and other device components.

Storage locations

An EtherCAT slave stores operating data in up to three locations:


• Depending on functionality and performance EtherCAT slaves have one or several local controllers for
processing I/O data. The corresponding program is the so-called firmware in *.efw format.
• In some EtherCAT slaves the EtherCAT communication may also be integrated in these controllers. In
this case the controller is usually a so-called FPGA chip with *.rbf firmware.
• In addition, each EtherCAT slave has a memory chip, a so-called ESI-EEPROM, for storing its own
device description (ESI: EtherCAT Slave Information). On power-up this description is loaded and the
EtherCAT communication is set up accordingly. The device description is available from the download
area of the Beckhoff website at (https://www.beckhoff.com). All ESI files are accessible there as zip
files.

Customers can access the data via the EtherCAT fieldbus and its communication mechanisms. Acyclic
mailbox communication or register access to the ESC is used for updating or reading of these data.

The TwinCAT System Manager offers mechanisms for programming all three parts with new data, if the
slave is set up for this purpose. Generally the slave does not check whether the new data are suitable, i.e. it
may no longer be able to operate if the data are unsuitable.

Simplified update by bundle firmware

The update using so-called bundle firmware is more convenient: in this case the controller firmware and the
ESI description are combined in a *.efw file; during the update both the firmware and the ESI are changed in
the terminal. For this to happen it is necessary
• for the firmware to be in a packed format: recognizable by the file name, which also contains the
revision number, e.g. ELxxxx-xxxx_REV0016_SW01.efw
• for password=1 to be entered in the download dialog. If password=0 (default setting) only the firmware
update is carried out, without an ESI update.
• for the device to support this function. The function usually cannot be retrofitted; it is a component of
many new developments from year of manufacture 2016.

Following the update, its success should be verified


• ESI/Revision: e.g. by means of an online scan in TwinCAT ConfigMode/FreeRun – this is a convenient
way to determine the revision
• Firmware: e.g. by looking in the online CoE of the device

EL252x Version: 4.3 225


Appendix

NOTE
Risk of damage to the device!
ü Note the following when downloading new device files
a) Firmware downloads to an EtherCAT device must not be interrupted
b) Flawless EtherCAT communication must be ensured. CRC errors or LostFrames must be avoided.
c) The power supply must adequately dimensioned. The signal level must meet the specification.
ð In the event of malfunctions during the update process the EtherCAT device may become unusable and
require re-commissioning by the manufacturer.

7.2.1 Device description ESI file/XML


NOTE
Attention regarding update of the ESI description/EEPROM
Some slaves have stored calibration and configuration data from the production in the EEPROM. These are
irretrievably overwritten during an update.

The ESI device description is stored locally on the slave and loaded on start-up. Each device description has
a unique identifier consisting of slave name (9 characters/digits) and a revision number (4 digits). Each slave
configured in the System Manager shows its identifier in the EtherCAT tab:

Fig. 176: Device identifier consisting of name EL3204-0000 and revision -0016

The configured identifier must be compatible with the actual device description used as hardware, i.e. the
description which the slave has loaded on start-up (in this case EL3204). Normally the configured revision
must be the same or lower than that actually present in the terminal network.

For further information on this, please refer to the EtherCAT system documentation.

Update of XML/ESI description


The device revision is closely linked to the firmware and hardware used. Incompatible combinations
lead to malfunctions or even final shutdown of the device. Corresponding updates should only be
carried out in consultation with Beckhoff support.

Display of ESI slave identifier

The simplest way to ascertain compliance of configured and actual device description is to scan the
EtherCAT boxes in TwinCAT mode Config/FreeRun:

226 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

Fig. 177: Scan the subordinate field by right-clicking on the EtherCAT device

If the found field matches the configured field, the display shows

Fig. 178: Configuration is identical

otherwise a change dialog appears for entering the actual data in the configuration.

Fig. 179: Change dialog

In this example in Fig. Change dialog, an EL3201-0000-0017 was found, while an EL3201-0000-0016 was
configured. In this case the configuration can be adapted with the Copy Before button. The Extended
Information checkbox must be set in order to display the revision.

EL252x Version: 4.3 227


Appendix

Changing the ESI slave identifier

The ESI/EEPROM identifier can be updated as follows under TwinCAT:


• Trouble-free EtherCAT communication must be established with the slave.
• The state of the slave is irrelevant.
• Right-clicking on the slave in the online display opens the EEPROM Update dialog, Fig. EEPROM
Update

Fig. 180: EEPROM Update

The new ESI description is selected in the following dialog, see Fig. Selecting the new ESI. The checkbox
Show Hidden Devices also displays older, normally hidden versions of a slave.

Fig. 181: Selecting the new ESI

A progress bar in the System Manager shows the progress. Data are first written, then verified.

The change only takes effect after a restart.


Most EtherCAT devices read a modified ESI description immediately or after startup from the INIT.
Some communication settings such as distributed clocks are only read during power-on. The
EtherCAT slave therefore has to be switched off briefly in order for the change to take effect.

228 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

7.2.2 Firmware explanation

Determining the firmware version

Determining the version via the System Manager

The TwinCAT System Manager shows the version of the controller firmware if the master can access the
slave online. Click on the E-Bus Terminal whose controller firmware you want to check (in the example
terminal 2 (EL3204)) and select the tab CoE Online (CAN over EtherCAT).

CoE Online and Offline CoE


Two CoE directories are available:
• online: This is offered in the EtherCAT slave by the controller, if the EtherCAT slave supports this.
This CoE directory can only be displayed if a slave is connected and operational.
• offline: The EtherCAT Slave Information ESI/XML may contain the default content of the CoE.
This CoE directory can only be displayed if it is included in the ESI (e.g. “Beckhoff EL5xxx.xml”).
The Advanced button must be used for switching between the two views.

In Fig. Display of EL3204 firmware version the firmware version of the selected EL3204 is shown as 03 in
CoE entry 0x100A.

Fig. 182: Display of EL3204 firmware version

In (A) TwinCAT 2.11 shows that the Online CoE directory is currently displayed. If this is not the case, the
Online directory can be loaded via the Online option in Advanced Settings (B) and double-clicking on
AllObjects.

7.2.3 Updating controller firmware *.efw


CoE directory
The Online CoE directory is managed by the controller and stored in a dedicated EEPROM, which
is generally not changed during a firmware update.

Switch to the Online tab to update the controller firmware of a slave, see Fig. Firmware Update.

EL252x Version: 4.3 229


Appendix

Fig. 183: Firmware Update

Proceed as follows, unless instructed otherwise by Beckhoff support. Valid for TwinCAT 2 and 3 as
EtherCAT master.
• Switch TwinCAT system to ConfigMode/FreeRun with cycle time >= 1 ms (default in ConfigMode is
4 ms). A FW-Update during real time operation is not recommended.

• Switch EtherCAT Master to PreOP

• Switch slave to INIT (A)


• Switch slave to BOOTSTRAP

230 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

• Check the current status (B, C)


• Download the new *efw file (wait until it ends). A password will not be necessary usually.

• After the download switch to INIT, then PreOP


• Switch off the slave briefly (don't pull under voltage!)
• Check within CoE 0x100A, if the FW status was correctly overtaken.

7.2.4 FPGA firmware *.rbf


If an FPGA chip deals with the EtherCAT communication an update may be accomplished via an *.rbf file.
• Controller firmware for processing I/O signals
• FPGA firmware for EtherCAT communication (only for terminals with FPGA)

The firmware version number included in the terminal serial number contains both firmware components. If
one of these firmware components is modified this version number is updated.

Determining the version via the System Manager

The TwinCAT System Manager indicates the FPGA firmware version. Click on the Ethernet card of your
EtherCAT strand (Device 2 in the example) and select the Online tab.

The Reg:0002 column indicates the firmware version of the individual EtherCAT devices in hexadecimal and
decimal representation.

EL252x Version: 4.3 231


Appendix

Fig. 184: FPGA firmware version definition

If the column Reg:0002 is not displayed, right-click the table header and select Properties in the context
menu.

Fig. 185: Context menu Properties

The Advanced Settings dialog appears where the columns to be displayed can be selected. Under
Diagnosis/Online View select the '0002 ETxxxx Build' check box in order to activate the FPGA firmware
version display.

232 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

Fig. 186: Dialog Advanced Settings

Update

For updating the FPGA firmware


• of an EtherCAT coupler the coupler must have FPGA firmware version 11 or higher;
• of an E-Bus Terminal the terminal must have FPGA firmware version 10 or higher.

Older firmware versions can only be updated by the manufacturer!

Updating an EtherCAT device

The following sequence order have to be met if no other specifications are given (e.g. by the Beckhoff
support):
• Switch TwinCAT system to ConfigMode/FreeRun with cycle time >= 1 ms (default in ConfigMode is
4 ms). A FW-Update during real time operation is not recommended.

EL252x Version: 4.3 233


Appendix

• In the TwinCAT System Manager select the terminal for which the FPGA firmware is to be updated (in
the example: Terminal 5: EL5001) and
click the Advanced Settings button in the EtherCAT tab:

• The Advanced Settings dialog appears. Under ESC Access/E²PROM/FPGA click on Write FPGA
button:

234 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

• Select the file (*.rbf) with the new FPGA firmware, and transfer it to the EtherCAT device:

• Wait until download ends


• Switch slave current less for a short time (don't pull under voltage!). In order to activate the new FPGA
firmware a restart (switching the power supply off and on again) of the EtherCAT device is required.
• Check the new FPGA status

NOTE
Risk of damage to the device!
A download of firmware to an EtherCAT device must not be interrupted in any case! If you interrupt this
process by switching off power supply or disconnecting the Ethernet link, the EtherCAT device can only be
recommissioned by the manufacturer!

7.2.5 Simultaneous updating of several EtherCAT devices


The firmware and ESI descriptions of several devices can be updated simultaneously, provided the devices
have the same firmware file/ESI.

Fig. 187: Multiple selection and firmware update

Select the required slaves and carry out the firmware update in BOOTSTRAP mode as described above.

EL252x Version: 4.3 235


Appendix

7.3 Restoring the delivery state


To restore the delivery state (factory settings) for backup objects in ELxxxx terminals, the CoE object
Restore default parameters, SubIndex 001 can be selected in the TwinCAT System Manager (Config mode)
(see Fig. Selecting the Restore default parameters PDO)

Fig. 188: Selecting the Restore default parameters PDO

Double-click on SubIndex 001 to enter the Set Value dialog. Enter the value 1684107116 in field Dec or the
value 0x64616F6C in field Hex and confirm with OK (Fig. Entering a restore value in the Set Value dialog).
All backup objects are reset to the delivery state.

Fig. 189: Entering a restore value in the Set Value dialog

Alternative restore value


In some older terminals the backup objects can be switched with an alternative restore value:
Decimal value: 1819238756, Hexadecimal value: 0x6C6F6164An incorrect entry for the restore
value has no effect.

236 Version: 4.3 EL252x


Appendix

7.4 Support and Service


Beckhoff and their partners around the world offer comprehensive support and service, making available fast
and competent assistance with all questions related to Beckhoff products and system solutions.

Beckhoff's branch offices and representatives

Please contact your Beckhoff branch office or representative for local support and service on Beckhoff
products!

The addresses of Beckhoff's branch offices and representatives round the world can be found on her internet
pages: www.beckhoff.com

You will also find further documentation for Beckhoff components there.

Support

The Beckhoff Support offers you comprehensive technical assistance, helping you not only with the
application of individual Beckhoff products, but also with other, wide-ranging services:
• support
• design, programming and commissioning of complex automation systems
• and extensive training program for Beckhoff system components
Hotline: +49 5246 963 157
e-mail: support@beckhoff.com
web: www.beckhoff.com/support

Service

The Beckhoff Service Center supports you in all matters of after-sales service:
• on-site service
• repair service
• spare parts service
• hotline service
Hotline: +49 5246 963 460
e-mail: service@beckhoff.com
web: www.beckhoff.com/service

Headquarters Germany

Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG

Hülshorstweg 20
33415 Verl
Germany
Phone: +49 5246 963 0
e-mail: info@beckhoff.com
web: www.beckhoff.com

EL252x Version: 4.3 237


More Information:
www.beckhoff.com/EL2xxx

Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG


Hülshorstweg 20
33415 Verl
Germany
Phone: +49 5246 9630
info@beckhoff.com
www.beckhoff.com

You might also like